JP6521598B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, the present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media and controlling to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that control a plurality of types of hits. There were a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a special gaming state in the plurality of types of hits. The first specific gaming state is a gaming state in which a period during which an opening and closing of a special winning opening is controlled to a state in which game media easily enter is the first period (for example, a normal jackpot and probability fluctuation Say) a big hit. The second specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the period in which the bonus opening / closing item is controlled to a state in which gaming media easily enter is the second period shorter than the first period (for example, sudden oddity big hit (for example It is also called “a sudden big hit”)). The special game state is the second period during which the character that opens and closes the special winning opening is controlled to a state where game media can easily enter, and the game state that does not change the game state after the termination (for example, small hit Etc).

  In addition to the signal output when being controlled to the first specific gaming state and the signal that is output when being controlled to the second specific gaming state, it is also output when being controlled to the special gaming state There is a gaming machine which outputs a signal to be outputted to the outside (for example, see Patent Document 1). The gaming machine does not output a special gaming state signal to the outside during the high base.

JP, 2011-67255, A

  In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that it may be difficult to externally recognize that a special gaming state has occurred.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately recognizing that the special gaming state is being controlled outside the gaming machine. is there.

(1) It is possible to play a game using game media (for example, game balls), and variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol) is performed. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, the opening control state of the special winning opening),
Holding storage means (for example, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer in FIG. 19B) capable of storing information on variable display as the holding storage information;
Hold display means (for example, a total hold hold display unit 18c of FIG. 1) for displaying a hold display according to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means;
Determining means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, steps S61, S62, and S73 of FIG. 22) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state;
Determining means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, steps S1217 and S1228 in FIG. 18) for determining whether or not to be controlled to the specific gaming state before the determination by the determining means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the hold display is changed to a display mode (for example, a special mode, a first special mode, a second special mode) different from the normal mode and controlled to the specific gaming state Means (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control, based on the determination result of the pre-reading effect determination process in step S 671 of FIG. Step S1813 in FIG. 55 and Step S1845 in FIG. 58 are executed).
Indication effect executing means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control, performing the pre-reading effect determination process of FIG. 45 executed in step S 671 in FIG. 43) for executing indication effect suggesting that the display mode of the suspension display changes Step S1813 in FIG. 55 and step S1845 in FIG.
In a first state (for example, an open state) provided in a game area (for example, game area 7) where the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, for example) A variable winning ball device (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a, the second special variable winning ball device 20b) capable of changing to the closed state;
Game control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state which is easier to control to the specific gaming state as compared to the normal gaming state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560, in the big hit end processing of FIG. If so, the hour-shortening flag is set in step S167, and if it is a probability variation big hit or a sudden probability big hit, the probability variation flag and the time short flag are set in steps S170 and S171. Do not change.) And
The specified game state is a first specified game state (e.g., 15 rounds of normal big hit game state opening) in which the period during which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is the first period (e.g., 29 seconds) Control state, open control state of 15 round probability variation big hit gaming state), and a second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) in which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is shorter than the first period ) And the second specific gaming state (for example, the opening control state of the sudden big hit gaming state)
The game control means controls the gaming state to the special gaming state when the second specific gaming state is ended (for example, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set in step S170 and step S171 of FIG. 31),
The period during which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is the second period, and is controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state release control state) in which the gaming state is not changed after completion. (For example, in the small hitting end process of FIG. 34, neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is changed), and
An external output unit (for example, the microcomputer for gaming control 560, FIG. 39) for outputting the special gaming state signal (for example, two jackpots, see FIG. 63) to the outside of the gaming machine when being controlled to the special gaming state. Step S1063) of the
The external output means has a specific period (for example, 12.3 seconds in the low base state, 12.3 seconds in the high base state) when the variable winning ball device changes from the first state to the second state. 1.1 seconds, see Fig. 63), continuously output the special game status signal,
When the player is controlled to the special game state from the advantageous game state (for example, high base state, definite change state, time reduction state) for the player, and the game state (for example, low base state) disadvantageous to the advantageous game state. When the special game state is controlled from the non-probability state, the non-time-short state, the specific period is different (for example, in the case of a small hit, 12.3 seconds in the low base state, 1. in the high base state). 1 second),
An effect executing means (for example, in the first modification and the second modification of the first embodiment) that executes an effect related to the control in the second specific gaming state and the control in the special gaming state Execute common appearance effect, common effect display, and notification to aim at combination operation gate 33, and common end display. The related effects are not limited to exactly the same effects, and both a big hit and a small hit The effect may be a different effect as long as the effect is recalled to the player. Further production, etc.)),
The specific period is shorter when the special gaming state is controlled from the advantageous gaming state than when it is controlled from the adverse gaming state to the special gaming state (for example, when it is a small hit) , 12.3 seconds in the low base state, 1.1 seconds in the high base state),
The suggested effect is the suggested effect (success pattern) of the first pattern executed when the display mode of the pending display changes, and the suggested effect of the second pattern executed when the display mode of the pending display does not change Failure pattern) and
The suggestion effect of the second pattern is executed even when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display means , and , when the there is a display pending that is displayed in a manner different from the usual aspect, at a higher rate than without the hold display is suggested effect (failure patterns) of the second pattern that is performed It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate effects in the second specific gaming state and the special gaming state. Further, when being controlled to the special game state, the special game state signal can be appropriately output to the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately recognizing that the special gaming state is being controlled outside the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The advantageous gaming state than the unfavorable gaming state, and said a state easy trigger has occurred and the special game state signal is output by the external output means,
If You wherein the beneficial gaming state when it is controlled to the special gaming state, the than when controlled in the special game state from adverse gaming state, the short specified period (for example, a Koatari , 12.3 seconds in the low base state, 1.1 seconds in the high base state).

According to such a configuration, it triggers a special gaming state signal is output in the prone advantageous gaming state occurs, a specific time period the special gaming state signal is output is shortened. As a result, it can be suppressed that the special gaming state signal output when being controlled to the special gaming state continues until the timing when the next special gaming state signal is output.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It further comprises a specific area (for example, a combination operation gate 33) provided in the gaming area,
The second specific gaming state is controlled based on the game medium having entered the specific area (for example, in the case of proceeding to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing in step S139 of FIG. 26, the step of FIG. 27) When it is determined that the combination operation gate 33 has won in S391, opening of the big winning opening is started in step S396.) On the other hand, it is not based on the fact that game media has entered the specific area, the special game It is controlled to the state (for example, when shifting to the small hit opening pre-processing in step S151 in FIG. 26, it is not judged whether or not the winning combination winning operation gate 33 has won, the big winning in step S2467 in FIG. Opening of the mouth is started.).

  According to such a configuration, the game does not become monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
After the game medium passes through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the gaming area, the start condition (for example, the number of holding memories In the case where it is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and each can be identified based on the establishment of the jackpot game). Variable display means (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the variation display of the production symbol) of a plurality of types of identification information and a predetermined display result (for example, big hit) predetermined on the variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result It is controlled to the specific gaming state when the symbol) is derived and displayed (for example, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the symbol determination time is timed out in step S132 of FIG. 26). When the pattern is established by, it shifts to the first special winning opening open pretreatment in step S139 if the big hit, the process proceeds with S151 if Koatari to Koatari open pretreatment.),
Numerical data extraction means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, steps S1216 and S1227 in FIG. 18) for extracting numerical data when game media pass through the start area;
With respect to a variable display where game media has passed through the start area but the start condition has not been satisfied yet, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Holding storage means (for example, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer in FIG. 19B) which store (for example, the first holding storage and the second holding storage);
Hold display means (for example, total hold memory display unit 18c of FIG. 1) for displaying a hold display in a predetermined display manner corresponding to each of the hold memories stored in the hold memory means;
Pre-determination means (for example, game control to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be the specific display result using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means when the start condition is satisfied Microcomputer 560, and steps S61, S62 and S73) of FIG.
Variable display control means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, step S1813 in FIG. 55, step S1845 in FIG. 58) for performing control of variable display based on the determination result by the pre-determination means;
Specification determination means (for example, for game control) which determines whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result before the determination of the predetermination means A microcomputer 560, and steps S1217 and S1228 in FIG.
The pending display corresponding to the pending storage that the display result of the variable display based on the pending storage stored in the pending storage means may become the specific display result based on the determination result by the specific determining means Means for executing an advance notice effect (for example, pre-reading effect) for giving notice by changing the display mode (for example, the special mode, the first special mode, the second special mode) different from the normal mode For example, based on the effect control microcomputer 100, step S1813 in FIG. 55 and step S1845 in FIG. 58 based on the result of the pre-reading effect determination process in step S671 in FIG.
Indication effect executing means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control, performing the pre-reading effect determination process of FIG. 45 executed in step S 671 in FIG. 43) for executing indication effect suggesting that the display mode of the suspension display changes Step S 1813 of FIG. 55 and step S 1845 of FIG.
The preview effect execution means determines whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display unit (for example, the hold display change flag is Depending on whether or not it is set, any one of the hold display being displayed by the hold display means at a different rate is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode and displayed (for example, effect control The determination value is different based on whether or not the pending display change flag is set in steps S67104 and S67108 of the pre-reading effect determination process of FIG. 45 performed by the microcomputer 100 in step S671 of FIG. Select the pre-reading effect execution determination table set in step 2 and the pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table The presence or absence of execution of pre-reading effect and the change timing in the case of execution are determined, and step S1813 in FIG. 55 and step S1845 in FIG. 48-51).

  According to such a configuration, an interest can be given to the display mode of the hold display when the advance notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the preliminary production.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The start condition (for example, when the number of held memories is not 0) after the game medium passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area, (1) Variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and variable of multiple types of identification information that can identify each on the basis of the fact that the jackpot game is not executed) is established The display (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the variation display of the effect symbol) is performed, and the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) predetermined as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. It is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, when the symbol determination time is timed out and the symbol is determined in step S 132 of FIG. Shifts in step S139 in the first special winning opening open before treatment if Ride, transitioning S151 if Koatari to Koatari open before processing.),
Numerical data extraction means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, steps S1216 and S1227 in FIG. 18) for extracting numerical data when game media pass through the start area;
With respect to a variable display where game media has passed through the start area but the start condition has not been satisfied yet, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Holding storage means (for example, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer in FIG. 19B) which store (for example, the first holding storage and the second holding storage);
Hold display means (for example, a total hold storage display unit 18c of FIG. 1) for displaying the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display;
Pre-determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be the specific display result using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means based on satisfaction of the start condition. A microcomputer 560 for game control, steps S61, S62 and S73) of FIG.
Specification determination means (for example, game control to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result before the determination of the predetermination means Microcomputer 560, and further comprising steps S1217 and S1228 of FIG.
The display mode of the reserve display is a normal mode (for example, “o”: see FIG. 77A) and a special mode (for example, six lines drawn outside “o”) different from the normal mode. 78 (see FIG. 78B) and the first special mode (for example, "○" includes an "x" in a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode); see FIG. 77 (B1). And the second special mode (for example, two “X” s are included in “o”: see FIG. 77 (B2)),
According to the determination result of the specific determination means, the hold notification corresponding to the pending storage that is the determination target of the specific determination means at a different ratio is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode The effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S67106 and S67114 in FIG. 71, step S1813 in FIG. 76, step S1845 in FIG. 58), which can execute effects (for example, pre-read effects), see FIG. Further)),
The effect executing means changes and displays the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (for example, timing of start winning, arbitrary shift timing, other arbitrary timing, etc.) When it is determined that the hold display is displayed in the special mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines in step S67107 of FIG. 71) (when the step S67112 is executed), the hold indication is displayed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the reserve display is started. Change and display (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, steps S1803 and S in FIG. 76). 811, S1813, etc. Step S1845 of FIG. 58. FIG. 73, FIG. 74, FIG. 78, see FIG. 79).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so diversity in timing when the display mode of the hold display is changed While the hold display can be displayed in the special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the game machine from the back. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of bit assignment of an output port in the game control means. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of bit assignment of an input port in the game control means. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of a terminal board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 2 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a judgment result specification command at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing of the first big winning a prize opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening opening processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a block diagram showing various signals outputted to a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a field (criterion decision result storage buffer) which saves a prize decision result. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect execution decision table. It is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table and a preread effect pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st pre-reading production | presentation change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd pre-reading effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd pre-reading effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 3rd pre-reading effect change timing determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect. It is a timing chart which shows the output of 2 jackpots. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden probability big hit and small hit. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden probability big hit and small hit in the 1st modification. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden probability big hit and small hit in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit display process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the first big winning a prize mouth opening pretreatment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of production design fluctuation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a suggestion production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading effect determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch production | presentation execution determination table and the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-reading effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect change timing determination table in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 1st pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect design is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story property may be executed, and an effect such as displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern may be performed. For example, a battle wrestling, a soccer game, and a battle game in which an enemy ally character fights are performed, and if it is a big hit, a game or battle is won, and if it is out, a game or battle is defeated. It is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be performed such that a predetermined story such as a story is sequentially developed.

  On the left side of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). On the right side of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers from 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having won 14), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and The game is started based on the establishment of the jackpot game), and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, a winning is that a game ball has entered an area, such as a winning opening, which is determined in advance as a winning area. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  At the lower part of the first special symbol display 8a, 4 is displayed to indicate the number of activated winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of one indicator (for example, an LED) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by execution of processing for performing display control in display control processing (step S22) of timer interrupt processing described later.

  At the lower part of the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserved memory number A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by execution of processing for performing display control in display control processing (step S22) of timer interrupt processing described later.

  In addition, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number (total hold storage number) which is the sum of the first reserve storage number and the second reserve storage number. ing. In this embodiment, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the second hold storage is displayed in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 in the total hold storage display unit 18c. Ru. Note that the total hold storage display unit 18c may display the first hold storage or the second hold storage in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold storage is displayed in red) , Second pending storage may be displayed in blue). Further, even if the first hold storage display unit for displaying the first hold storage number and the second hold storage display unit for displaying the second hold storage number are provided instead of the total hold storage display unit 18c. Good.

  The effect display device 9 is used for decoration during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production design as a design of The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are approximately the same (or may be the same) and the periods of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be the same). In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a first special variable winning ball device 20 a is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The first special variable winning prize ball device 20a has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b (big hit In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening and closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21a to be in the open state, and the first large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the first big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The second special variable winning ball device 20b has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b (big hit In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21b, whereby the second large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening is detected by the second count switch 23b.

  Hereinafter, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b may be collectively referred to as a special variable winning ball device, and the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be large winning openings. It may be called generically.

  In this embodiment, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, and then, The first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately opened in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the gaming ball passes through the key operating gate 33 and is detected by the key operating switch 33a. It is controlled to be in the state. For example, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (15 rounds) in the specific gaming state (in the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit which will be described later), the first big winning port as the first round. Is controlled to the open state, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (or when a predetermined open time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses), the first large winning opening is controlled to be in the closed state, and as the second round, 2 large winning opening is controlled to the open state. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 32 described later, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening alternate in the small hit as well as the big hit, the big hit and the positive hit. Is controlled to be in the open state.

  For example, if there is only one large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening) and the large winning opening is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) The game ball pointing to the mouth is taken into the out port 26 as it is, when the round is finished and the big prize port is controlled to be closed when the big prize port is reached. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, if the configuration is such that two big winning openings are positioned up and down, and controlled to open alternately in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), 1) The game ball heading for the big winning opening is the second big winning provided immediately below even if the first round is finished and the first big winning opening is controlled to be closed when the first big winning opening is reached Since the mouth is controlled to the open state as the second round, there is a possibility of winning in the second large winning opening. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls taken into the out port 26 without winning a large winning opening during the round of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided immediately below the first special variable winning ball device 20a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special variable winning ball device 20a is directed to the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The game ball may be provided at a position where it is easy to win when the first special variable winning ball device 20a is in the closed state, for example, the gaming ball is arranged by the nail arrangement around the first special variable winning ball device 20a. It may be provided at a position where it is easy to be led.

  An ordinary symbol display 10 is provided at the lower part of the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted indicators by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. Furthermore, in a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 will be hit is increased and the variable winning ball device 15 The opening time is extended, and the number of times of opening is increased. That is, in the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled such that the game ball is likely to be start winning (that is, the condition for executing the variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased also in the time saving state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened).

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a short time state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so an effective start winning is likely to occur. There is a high probability that a big hit game will be played.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state).

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an decoration LED 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, two speakers 27R and 27L for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided at the upper left and right of the game area 7, respectively. On the outer peripheral upper portion, outer peripheral left portion and outer peripheral right portion of the game area 7, a sky frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided. Also, a prize ball LED 51 is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28 b to be lit when there is a remaining number of prize balls, and a ball out LED 52 is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28 c to be lit when the supply sphere is broken. . The sky frame LED 28 a, the left frame LED 28 b, the right frame LED 28 c, and the decorative LED 25 are an example of a light emitter for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the various LEDs for effect (for decoration) described above, LEDs and lamps for effect are installed.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and started) The condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine as viewed from the back. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display control unit including a presentation control board 80 on which a presentation control microcomputer 100 for controlling the presentation display device 9 is mounted, a gaming control microcomputer, etc. Various boards such as a game control board (main board) 31 mounted, a voice output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control, etc. are mounted are installed There is. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200.

  Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91 are provided on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V and DC5V are mounted. The power supply substrate 910 is supplied with the game control substrate 31 and the respective electric component control substrates (the effect control substrate 80 and the payout control substrate 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the respective electric components (power) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A power switch as a power supply permission unit for executing or cutting off the power supply to the component (operating by), and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 of the game control board 31 ing. Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside of the substrate). In this embodiment, the case where the clear switch is provided on the power supply substrate 910 is described, but the installation location of the clear switch is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the game control board 31 and the payout control board 37 may be provided on a board other than the power supply board 910.

  Control means including a control microcomputer is mounted on each control board. The control means is an electric component provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like (gaming device: light emitting device such as ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, lamp or LED) Control the body, speaker 27 etc.). Hereinafter, the main substrate 31 may be included in the control substrate to be described. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electric components provided in the game machine according to the command signal from the game control means or the like. Moreover, the board | substrate with which microcomputers other than the main board | substrate 31 were mounted may be called a sub board | substrate. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out, to the upper plate or the lower plate, the gaming ball induced by the passage for guiding the gaming ball and the sprocket driven by the stepping motor or the like. A prize ball, a payout number counting switch for counting the lent balls, and the like are also configured as part of the unit.

  A terminal board 160 provided with terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the upper side of the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Terminal board 160, for example, information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of big hit gaming state (start opening signal shown in FIG. 35, symbol decision number 1 signal, symbol decision number 2 signal, big hit 1 signal, big hit 2 signal An information output terminal is provided to externally output the jackpot 3 signal, the short time signal, the security signal, the high confidence medium signal, the prize ball signal 1, and the gaming machine error state signal).

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the terminal substrate 160 is provided on the upper side of the back surface of the play frame side, the way of arranging the terminal substrate 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the back cover may be provided on the back side of the variable display control unit including the effect control board 80, and the terminal board 160 may be disposed on the game board side by attaching the terminal board 160 on the back cover. Good.

  The game balls stored in the storage tank 38 pass through a guiding rail (not shown), pass through a curved weir, and reach the ball dispensing device 97 covered by the dispensing case 40A. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball out switch 187 is provided as a game medium out detection means. When the ball breakage switch 187 detects the ball breakage, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device 97 is stopped. The out-of-ball switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the out-of-ball detection switch 167 for detecting a shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail It is provided in the adjacent part). When the out-of-ball detection switch 167 detects a shortage of gaming balls, the gaming mechanism is replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of gaming balls as prizes based on the prize and a gaming ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the gaming balls are guided to the surplus ball tray 4 through the surplus ball guiding passage. Further, when the gaming ball is paid out, the sensing lever (not shown) presses the full tank switch as the storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detection means is turned on. In that state, the rotation of the dispensing motor in the ball dispensing device is stopped, the operation of the ball dispensing device is stopped, and the driving of the ball striking device is also stopped.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the random number circuit 503 is set as an initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads out the numerical data from the random number circuit 503 as random R when the first start hole switch 13a or the second start hole switch 14a is subjected to the start winning combination, and starts the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes it is decided based on random R whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to be a jackpot. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state that is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special symbol process flag and the value of the combined hold storage number counter) and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply substrate is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The power supply substrate is provided with a reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 or the like. When the reset signal goes high, the gaming control microcomputer 560 becomes operable, and when the resetting signal goes low, the gaming control microcomputer 560 goes into a stopped state. Therefore, while the reset signal is at the high level, an allowance signal for permitting the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 560 or the like is output, and the period when the reset signal is at the low level is the gaming control microcomputer. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 and the like is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each of the electric component control boards (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. That is, the power supply substrate monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC 30 V, DC 5 V, etc.) used in the game machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value determined beforehand A power supply monitoring circuit is mounted which outputs a power-off signal indicating that when it detects it). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, the game control microcomputer 560 is supplied with detection signals from the combination operation switch 33a, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21a which opens and closes the first special variable winning ball device 20a which forms the first large winning opening, and the second special variable winning ball device which forms the second large winning opening An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21b for opening and closing 20b in accordance with an instruction from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 and the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b and the right frame LED 28c provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35 At the same time, control of the sound output from the speaker 27 is performed via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. Although the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70 in the example shown in FIG. 4, a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with the effect control microcomputer 100 including the effect control CPU 101 and the RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  Further, the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part of the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is maintained for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). The content is saved. In particular, at least data indicating a gaming state (a probability change state flag or a time saving state flag described later) is stored in the backup RAM. However, in this embodiment, the value of the time saving after counter for counting the number of changes after the shift to the time saving state described later is not stored in the backup RAM.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for previously storing character image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures or symbols (including an effect pattern). The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on data input from the CPU for effect control 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each of the LEDs provided on the frame side such as the sky frame LED 28 a, the left frame LED 28 b, and the right frame LED 28 c. Also, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 and outputs the signal to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing an example of assignment of output ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 5, the output port 0 outputs a payout control signal (a connection signal in this example) transmitted to the payout control board 37. In addition, the first special variable winning ball device 20a for opening and closing the special winning opening, the solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21a and 21b for opening and closing the second special variable winning ball device 20b, and the variable winning ball device 15 A drive signal for the solenoid (generally a motorized electric product solenoid) 16 for outputting is also outputted from the output port 0. In addition, among the signals output to the external device (for example, a hall computer) from the output port 0 via the terminal substrate 160, a high probability medium signal is also output.

  In addition, although the logic (for example, 0 is in an ON state) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is in an ON state) shown in FIG. 5 may be used, the main substrate 31 and the payout control substrate are particularly connected The “logic” is defined so that the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects an off state when there is a break in the signal line between 37 and when there is a cable disconnection (including cable disconnection). . Specifically, since high level is generally detected on the receiving side of the signal when disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, high level at the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is a game control means. "Logic" is defined to be off at the output port at. Therefore, an output buffer circuit that logically inverts a signal is provided outside the output port on the main substrate 31 if necessary.

  Then, from the output port 1 to the external device (for example, a hall computer) via the terminal substrate 160, various information output signals, that is, information related to control (for example, starting opening signal, symbol determination number 1 signal, symbol) Output data of the determined number of times of two signals, one signal for the big hit, two signals for the big hit, three signals for the big hit, a short time signal, a security signal) is output. However, as described above, the high-probability middle signal among the signals output to the outside is output from the output port 0. In this embodiment, a winning ball signal 1 (a signal output each time one winning ball payout is detected) to be described later or a gaming machine error status signal (a gaming machine is in an error status (in this example, the ball is out). The signal (indicating an error state or a full error state) is also output to the external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the side of the payout control board 37, a prize ball payout or an error state of the gaming machine is detected, and a winning ball signal 1 or a gaming machine error state signal is input to the main board 31. The prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error status signal input to the main substrate 31 are output to the outside via the terminal substrate 160 directly on the main substrate 31 without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. Be done. The prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error state signal input to the main substrate 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal substrate 160 after temporarily passing through the gaming control microcomputer 560.

  The signal externally output through the terminal substrate 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a door open signal indicating that the game slot is open may also be output to the external device via the terminal board 160. Further, for example, in this embodiment, the case is shown in which the prize ball signal 1 outputted every time one payout balls are detected is externally output, but instead of the prize ball signal 1, a prize Prize ball information may be output to an external device through the terminal substrate 160, which is output each time ten balls are detected. In this case, the payout control board 37 side also detects that the game frame is in the open state and the payout of the winning balls, and the door opening signal and the winning ball information are input to the main substrate 31. Then, the door open signal and the prize ball information input to the main substrate 31 are externally output via the terminal substrate 160 via the main substrate 31 as it is without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. However, it is assumed that the door open signal and the winning ball information are branched on the main substrate 31 and are also input to the game control microcomputer 560. Also in this case, the door open signal and the winning ball information input to the main substrate 31 may be externally output through the terminal substrate 160 after temporarily passing through the game control microcomputer 560. .

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing an example of bit assignment of the input port in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 6, in bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0, a first count switch 23a, a second count switch 23b, a gate switch 32a, a combination operation switch 33a, a magnet sensor signal 1, and a magnet sensor signal, respectively. 2, door open signal, winning ball information is input. In this embodiment, two magnet sensors (not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet are provided, and detection signals from the respective magnet sensors are also input from input port 0. . Further, a detection signal of the first start port switch 13a is input to bit 0 of the input port 1. A detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is input to bit 1 of the input port 1. Further, a detection signal of the winning a prize confirmation switch 14 b is input to bit 2 of the input port 1. Further, to the bits 3 and 4 of the input port 1, the detection signal of the clear switch and the power-off signal from the power supply substrate 910 is input, respectively.

  FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram showing an internal configuration of the terminal board 160. As shown in FIG. In the terminal substrate 160 shown in FIG. 7, the upper left connectors CN-1 and CN-2 are connectors for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal from the main substrate 31, and the lower left connectors CN1-3 are: It is a connector for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal from the payout control board 37 via the main board 31. Further, the connectors CN1 to CN11 on the right side are connectors for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal to an external device such as a hall computer. Further, on the terminal substrate 160, semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC11 as driver circuits are mounted.

  By connecting cables from the main board 31 to the connectors CN-1 and CN-2, various signals are inputted from the main board 31 (microcomputer for game control 560) to the terminal board 160. Specifically, the start opening signal is input to the terminal "2" of the connector CN-1, the symbol determination frequency 1 signal is input to the terminal "3" of the connector CN-1, and the terminal "4" of the connector CN-1 The symbol determination frequency 2 signal is input to the terminal, the big hit 1 signal is input to the terminal "5" of the connector CN-1, the big hit 2 signal is input to the terminal "6" of the connector CN-1, and the terminal of the connector CN-1 A big hit 3 signal is input to "7", a short time signal is input to terminal "8" of connector CN-1, a security signal is input to terminal "9" of connector CN-1, and a terminal of connector CN-2 A high probability medium signal is input to "9".

  Also, the cable from the payout control substrate 37 is connected to the connector CN-3 via the main substrate 31 so that various signals from the payout control substrate 37 (microcomputer 370 for payout control) are input to the terminal substrate 160. Be done. Specifically, the prize ball signal 1 is input to the terminal "2" of the connector CN-3, and the gaming machine error state signal is input to the terminal "3" of the connector CN-3.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the terminal substrate 160, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal "1" of the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2 and the connector CN-3, and the signal line is branched. Are connected to the input terminals "1" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11. In addition, the signal lines connected to the terminals "2" to "9" of the connector CN-1, the terminal "9" of the connector CN-2 and the connectors "2" and "3" of the connector CN-3 are each 1 K.OMEGA. The semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are connected to the input terminals "2" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 through the resistors R1 to R11. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN11, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals "3" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are connected to the terminals "2" of the connectors CN1 to CN11, respectively.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11, when the signal current flows to the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is irradiated through transparent silicon to a photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED. The light receiving photoelectric elements exchange voltage according to the amount of light, which charges the MOSFET gate at the output through the control circuit. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive to turn on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the control circuit rapidly discharges the gate load of the MOSFET. This control circuit causes the MOSFET to become nonconductive and turn off the load.

  The signals input from the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2 and the connector CN-3 on the input side are transmitted to the connectors CN1 to CN11 on the output side by the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 as described above, and a hall computer etc. Output to the external device. Specifically, a starting opening signal is output from the connector CN1, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal is output from the connector CN2, a symbol resolution frequency 2 signal is output from the connector CN3, and a big hit 1 signal is output from the connector CN4. 2 signals are output from CN5, 2 signals from CN6 are output from CN5, a short time signal is output from connector CN7, a security signal is output from connector CN8, and a high probability signal is output from connector CN9, the connector The prize ball signal 1 is output from the CN 10, and the gaming machine error state signal is output from the connector CN11. The assignment of connectors to each external output signal in terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the security signal may be output from the endmost connector (for example, the connector CN11) provided on the terminal substrate 160.

  The security signal output from the connector CN8 is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, as described later, when it is determined that the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning a prize confirmation switch 14b The security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). By configuring in this way, it is possible to use a radio wave or the like to recognize that the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14 is greater than the actual number of winnings, such as a hall computer or the like. Can be recognized on the external device side.

  In this embodiment, the security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) even when the game machine is powered on and initialization processing is executed. . By configuring as such, it is recognized that the initialization process is executed at an unnatural timing (for example, despite the fact that the power reset operation for all gaming machines has been completed at the time of opening the gaming arcade) By making it possible, an external device such as a hall computer can recognize the possibility that fraudulent activity such as aiming at a big hit at the timing of power reset by making the power of the gaming machine reset improperly can be performed. it can.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the abnormal winning is detected as described above, and the initialization process (for example, based on the fact that the operation by the clear switch is performed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine) A common security signal is externally output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 when processing such as clearing stored contents is executed. This is because the initialization process is usually performed only when the game machine power is reset when the game arcade is opened, so the terminal can not be output because it is output only once in a day. Providing a dedicated connector or semiconductor relay on the substrate 160 is not efficient and wasteful. Therefore, in this embodiment, a signal for external output is configured by outputting the security signal from the common connector CN8 when the abnormal winning is detected and when the initialization process is performed. The waste of wires and circuit elements is reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer and a complication of wiring work.

  The signal externally output from the common connector as a security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 but also the abnormal winning to the large winning opening and the first starting winning opening 13 can be detected and externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, also for the special winning opening and the first starting winning opening 13, as with the second starting winning opening 14, as a switch for detecting winning of a game ball, two types of switches having different detection methods (proximity switches A photo sensor may be provided to determine the presence or absence of an abnormal winning according to the same determination method as for the second start winning opening 14.

  Also, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a game machine, or when an abnormal radio wave is detected by a radio wave sensor provided in a game machine, as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 It may be configured to allow external output. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in a game machine is detected (for example, when occurrence of a short circuit or the like is detected by determining that an input value exceeds a threshold), the terminal board 160 is common. The connector CN 8 may be configured to be able to output an external signal as a security signal.

  As described above, also for the abnormal winning to the special winning opening, the abnormal winning to the first start winning opening 13, the abnormal magnetic error, the abnormal radio error can be externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 According to this configuration, if only one signal line is connected, error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load related to error detection can be reduced.

  In addition, when detecting an abnormal winning to the special winning opening, the number of detections by the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch become equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 10) If the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value indicating that a big hit is in progress (for example, the value of the special symbol process flag is not 5 or more), in addition to the case where it is determined based on that. Even when the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b in FIG. 17), it may be determined that the abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the abnormal winning to the special winning opening has occurred based on the detection results of the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 23b and the winning confirmation switch, or the value of the special symbol process flag Even when it is determined based on the abnormal winning to the special winning opening, as in step S2127 in the switch normal / abnormal check processing, by setting a predetermined time (for example, 4 minutes) in the security signal information timer The security signal may be output to the outside.

  Further, in this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 is selected based on the number of detections by the second start opening switch 14a and the number of detections by the prize confirmation switch 14b being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10). It is determined that the abnormal winning has occurred, and the security signal is output to the outside. For example, it is assumed that the value of the normal symbol process flag used in the normal symbol process processing is during the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 If the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a when the value is not the value shown, it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred, and the security signal is output externally. It is also good.

  In addition to the signal line for security signal output, detection of execution of initialization processing, detection of abnormal winning to the first start winning opening 13, detection of abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening Separate signal lines are provided for the detection of abnormal winnings on the screen, detection of abnormal magnetic errors, detection of abnormal radio errors, and from the terminal board 160, along with security signals, external output signals corresponding to the respective errors are also It may be output to an external device such as a hall computer. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an error has occurred by confirming the security signal, and to further confirm the type of error on the game store side by confirming the signal output for each type of error. It can be confirmed. Therefore, when it is requested from the game arcade side to confirm the type of error, by providing an external output signal for each type of error separately from the security signal, the external output more responsive to the needs of the game arcade is provided. It can be done. On the other hand, in the case of a game arcade requiring only confirmation that an error has occurred, of the externally output signals, only the security signal is connected to an external device such as a hall computer. You should check it.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 on the terminal substrate 160, it is possible to prevent signal input from the outside into the interior of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts. In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are provided on the terminal substrate 160. However, other relay elements such as mechanical relays may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S13a. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 also transmits to the effect control board 80 a combined pending storage number specification command in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter stored in the backup RAM is set in the process of step S 43 .

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 detects an abnormality of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening at the time of power on, and executes a large winning opening abnormal notification process at the time of power on for notifying of the special winning opening abnormality (step S13a ).

  In addition, with "big winning opening abnormality", that game ball is abnormal winning a prize in the 1st big winning opening or the 2nd big winning opening (specifically, the 1st big winning opening or the 2nd big winning opening is opened) That the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b). In this embodiment, as described above, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately controlled to the open state in the big hit gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b when not in the big hit gaming state, or even in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening is closed. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a while being controlled to the state, or when the second large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 23a In this case, the special winning opening abnormality is detected, and control to notify the special winning opening abnormality is performed. The first big winning opening or the second big winning is between when the game ball is won in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening and is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b. Since it is assumed that the mouth is controlled to be in the closed state, the first count switch 23a or the second count switch after a predetermined period has elapsed since the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening was controlled to be closed. When a game ball is detected by 23b, it may be determined that a big winning opening abnormality has occurred and detected.

  In step S13a, since the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state when the power is turned on, if the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b, a big winning opening abnormality occurs I judge. Then, when notifying a special winning opening abnormality, for example, the CPU 56 sets a security signal information timer for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example). In this embodiment, the information output process (see S30) is executed based on the fact that the security signal information timer has been set to the predetermined time in step S13a, whereby the security signal has a predetermined time (in this example, 30). Seconds) output to the outside. In addition, for example, the CPU 56 may perform control to transmit a special winning opening abnormality notification designation command for notifying a special winning opening abnormality to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 having received the special winning opening abnormality notification designation command performs control to display a screen indicating that the special winning opening abnormality has occurred on the effect display device 9, for example. An alert is issued for a prize hole abnormality.

  Also, in step S13a, unlike the big winning opening abnormality notification processing (step S21a) in the timer interrupt processing described later, the CPU 56 has a big winning opening abnormality in any of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. A notification is issued so that it can be identified if it has occurred. Specifically, if the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the CPU 56 controls, for example, the above-described notification, for example, a special lamp (for example, a special winning opening abnormality in the first special winning opening) Control to light a lamp (not shown in FIG. 1 etc.) provided to notify that it has occurred (for example, control to display a specific screen on the effect display device 9, or specific sound from the speaker 27 It may be control to output). By controlling in this way, it becomes possible to identify which big winning opening abnormality has occurred at which big winning opening only when the power is turned on, for example, when performing operation check of each device at the shipping stage of the gaming machine It can be confirmed whether the abnormality determination of both the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is made properly. In this embodiment, in the special winning opening abnormality informing process (step S21a) in the timer interrupt processing described later, whether the special winning opening abnormality occurred in which of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening May not be notified, but may be performed.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 9. Moreover, when making the display result of a special symbol into a big hit symbol, reach production is always performed. When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the reach effect is to be executed by a lottery using random numbers. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination of them is performed. (Switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 detects an abnormality of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening, and executes a special winning opening abnormality notification process for notifying of a special winning opening abnormality (step S21a).

  In step S21a, when the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a in a state where the first large winning opening opening flag indicating that the first large winning opening is in the open state is not set, or the CPU 56, When the game ball is detected by the second count switch 23b with the second large winning opening open flag indicating that the second large winning opening is in the open state, a large winning opening abnormality has occurred I will judge. Then, when notifying a special winning opening abnormality, for example, the CPU 56 sets a security signal information timer for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example). In this embodiment, the information output process (see S30) is executed based on the fact that the security signal information timer is set to the predetermined time in step S21a, whereby the security signal has a predetermined time (in this example, 30). Seconds) output to the outside. In addition, for example, the CPU 56 may perform control to transmit a special winning opening abnormality notification designation command for notifying a special winning opening abnormality to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 having received the special winning opening abnormality notification designation command performs control to display a screen indicating that the special winning opening abnormality has occurred on the effect display device 9, for example. An alert is issued for a prize hole abnormality. The first big winning opening or the second big winning is between when the game ball is won in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening and is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b. Since it is assumed that the mouth is controlled to be closed, the first count switch 23a or the second count is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the first large winning opening open flag or the second large winning opening open flag is reset. When a game ball is detected by the switch 23b, it may be determined that a big winning opening abnormality has occurred and detected.

  In this embodiment, in order to differentiate the notification method of the big winning opening abnormality at the time of power on and at other timings, the big winning opening abnormality notifying process (step S13a) at the time of power on is executed in the main processing. In the timer interrupt process, the special winning opening abnormality notifying process (step S21a) is executed. For example, the main turning on of the main processing is omitted, and the special winning opening abnormality notifying process is omitted. Set the power-on flag to indicate that it is on, and set the power-on flag when the special winning opening abnormality occurs in the special winning opening abnormality notification process of timer interrupt processing. While giving notification so that it is possible to identify whether the big winning opening abnormality occurred in which of the 1 big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening, the power on flag is reset, when the power is on If no lag is set, it may be configured to notify that the special winning opening abnormality occurs. Also, for example, when the main prize winning opening abnormality notification processing is omitted when the main processing is turned on, and when the special winning opening abnormality occurs in the special winning opening abnormality notification processing of the timer interrupt processing, notification of the special winning opening abnormality has already It is possible to specify which of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening the big winning opening abnormality has occurred if the abnormal notification flag indicating that is performed once or more is not set The alarm notification flag may be set, and if the abnormality notification flag is set, the notification that the special winning opening abnormality has occurred may be notified.

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the special symbol process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening (first large winning opening and second large winning opening) in a predetermined order Execute the corresponding processing according to the flag. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 is, for example, data such as a starting opening signal supplied to a computer for managing a hole, 1 signal of symbol determination number, 2 signals of symbol determination number, 1 to 3 signals of big hit, short time signal, security signal, high probability medium signal, etc. Information output processing for outputting the information (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b (see FIG. Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 is selected according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the on-board microcomputer for payout control. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 scene / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process processing is set, for example. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and Execute variable display of the second special symbol.

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.
By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stop-displayed.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, small hits are permitted up to the number of times the number of opening of the big winning opening is small (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds) as compared with the above-mentioned probability variation big hit and normal big hit. It is a hit. When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the case of sudden big hit or small hit, the opening time per one time is shortened and the number of times of opening of the big winning opening is reduced as compared with the normal big hit and the positive hit. I made it. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of suddenly becoming a big hit or a small hit, it is sufficient if the number of winnings of the game ball to the big winning opening decreases at least as compared with at least a big hit or a big hit. For example, in the case of sudden big hit and small hit, either the shortening of the opening time per one time and the reduction of the number of opening of the big winning opening compared to the big hit and the positive big hit usually Only one or the other may be executed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is not accompanied by the reach state, shortening non-reach out and non-reach out Is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern involves the reach state, the normal is deviated, the pseudo run 1 normal is slipped, the super run out, the pseudo run 2 super run off and the pseudo run 3 supermarkets are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, in the case of using the shift of the pseudo reciprocate 1 normal among the fluctuation patterns accompanied with the effect of the pseudo reciprocation, revariation is performed once. Further, in the case of using a shift of the pseudo run 2 super among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo run effect, the re-run is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using a shift of the pseudo run 3 super among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo run effect, the rerun is performed three times. The re-variation is to execute the variable display of the effect pattern again after temporarily stopping the effect pattern that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the effect pattern until the display result is derived and displayed. In addition, when performing re-variation, you may make it temporarily stop the pseudo run special symbol which appears only at the time of the pseudo run which is not in arrangement | sequence of a production | presentation pattern. Further, among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 10, the shortened non-reach loss is a variation pattern for shortening provided for the non-reach loss and for which the variation time is shorter than the non-reach loss.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol usually becomes a big hit or a probability variation big hit, per normal, 1 per ream, per super, pseudo ream Per 2 supermarkets and pseudo ream per 3 supermarkets are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, in the case of using a pseudo ream per normal among the fluctuation patterns accompanied with pseudo ream effects, re-fluctuation is performed once. In addition, in the case of using per simulated ream 2 super among fluctuation patterns accompanied with pseudo ream effects, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using per simulated ream 3 super among fluctuation patterns accompanied by pseudo ream effects, re-variation is performed three times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a special hit is prepared as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol suddenly becomes a probability variation big hit or a small hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the fluctuation time is fixedly determined in accordance with the type of reach (for example, the fluctuation in the case of super reach with pseudo ream (three times)). Although the time is fixed at 40 seconds and the variation time is fixed at 25 seconds in the case of a super reach without pseudo run), for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, addition The variation time may be varied according to the number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3 and 4) The variation pattern determination table may be prepared, and the variation time may be made different by selecting the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number.

  Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (in the example shown in FIG. 10, the time saving state). The judgment value is set so that the rate at which “shortened non-reach is deviated” whose fluctuation time is short compared to other fluctuation patterns is selected is high), not limited to this, a normal state (or short time state) Even in this case, the fluctuation time may be different (that is, the ratio of selection of fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time may be different) according to the total number of pending storages. For example, as the total number of pending storages increases, the fluctuation time may be shortened (that is, the proportion of selection of fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time may be increased). Also, for example, when the first special symbol is subjected to fluctuation display, the fluctuation time is made different (that is, the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is made different) according to the first number of pending storages If the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, the fluctuation time is made different according to the second reserved memory number (that is, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is made different) You may do so. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3 and 4) The variation pattern determination table may be prepared, and the variation time may be made different by selecting the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number.

  When configured to use different variation pattern determination tables according to the number of pending storages, for example, the variation pattern determination table used when the display result is out and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is total pending As compared with the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of memories is 0 to 2, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of reach (normal reach, super reach) is reduced. In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is three or more is determined so that the rate at which “shortened non-reach out” is selected is short as compared to other fluctuation patterns. Is set. As a result, as the total number of pending storages increases, the average fluctuation time can be shortened, and the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display decreases can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is three or more and the variation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2 have specific effects (for example, super reach). A common judgment value (e.g., 950 to 997, etc.) is assigned to a fluctuation pattern (or a set of such fluctuation patterns) with. Therefore, regardless of the total number of pending storages (that is, even if the used variation pattern determination table is different), it is possible to identify a specific effect by confirming the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) at the start winning combination. For example, it can be easily determined in advance whether or not it involves super reach. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the specific effect (for example, super reach) is accompanied before the variable display corresponding to the start winning (for example, the effect control command indicating that is sent to the microcomputer 100 for effect control). This can be realized by performing effects such as pre-reading effect and the like in the microcomputer for effect control 100 that has transmitted and received the effect control command), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, although the case where the allocation of the determination value is made to differ is shown about two types of whether the total pending memory number is 0-2 or 3 or more, it does not restrict to this, for example, according to the total pending memory number Furthermore, the allocation may be made to differ in stages in more detail. In this case, for example, a variation pattern determination table for the total number of pending storages 0, 1 and a variation pattern determination table for two total pending storages, three for total pending storages and four for total pending storages It is possible to prepare in advance, and to make the assignment of the judgment value to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach or the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation different gradually.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination).

  (2) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination).

  (3) Random 4 (MR 4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).

  (4) Random 5 (MR5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for random 4 initial value determination).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined to be any variation pattern included in the variation pattern determination table using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  At step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 9, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random number (random 3) or the initial value random number (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 12A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 12 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical values described in FIG. 12A are the jackpot determination values.

  12B and 12C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 12B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 12C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 12B and 12C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), it is decided to make the special symbol a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 12A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), when using the small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hitting at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  12D and 12E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 12 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 12 (E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), ten judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, 3 decision values are assigned to the "suddenly probable variation big hit" (proportion of 3/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol). The determination values set in the table are different in number and are not allocated redundantly.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), there are two rounds of sudden odd change big hit as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, which is larger than the gaming value. The case of determining 15 rounds of big hit (probable variation big hit or normal big hit) as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of game value is given will be described, but when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first 1 shows the case where it is determined to be in the specific gaming state, but the gaming value to be provided is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types.

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S170 and S171 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  Also, "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, is not transferred to the definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends, and is only transferred to time saving state (see step S167 described later) . Then, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time saving state ends even if a big hit occurs before ending the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times after shifting to the time saving state (see step S134 described later).

  Also, "a sudden definite big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "a positive variation big hit" or a "normal big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times of opening for 0.1 seconds). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. And in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the two rounds, it shifts to a definite change state (In this embodiment, it shifts to a definite change state and also shifts to a time saving state. Step S170 mentioned later. , S171)). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained (described later) Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the jackpot type, the gaming state, etc. is there. When the value of (1 to 997) of the extracted random 3 matches the data (determination value) assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 56 changes the variation pattern to a pattern corresponding to the determination value of the matching variation pattern. decide. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of the determination value allocated for each variation pattern is shown. For example, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "off" in the normal gaming state ("off" field in FIG. 13), the determination value corresponding to the value of random 3 (1 to 997) 50% of them are set to the fluctuation pattern "non-reach out". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 13, each value set in the fluctuation pattern determination table indicates that the variable display result is “off”, “off (time reduction)”, “normal big hit / probable big hit” or “suddenly positive odds In the case of “small hit time”, the ratio determined for the associated fluctuation pattern is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is to be “off” in the normal gaming state (“off” field in FIG. 13), of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, The rate at which it is determined that "non-reach is out" is the highest, and the rate at which it is determined that "simulated rerun 3 super is off" is the lowest. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be “off” in the time saving state (“off (time reduction)” field in FIG. 13), “non-off” field is different from “non-off” field. Judgment values are assigned such that the rate at which it is determined that "shortage non-reach is not performed" is high without being determined as reach out. By setting in this manner, in the time saving state, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time can be easily selected.

  In addition, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is to be “normally big hit” or “probably big hit” (“normal big hit / probable big hit” field in FIG. 13), the variation pattern with pseudo-series effects The judgment value is assigned such that the ratio determined as “per pseudo recurrent 3 super” is the highest, and the ratio determined as “pseudo ream 1 normal” is the lowest. That is, in the “normal big hit / probable variation big hit” field, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo runs among the variation patterns with pseudo run effects is easily selected. Therefore, in the pseudo-series effect, the larger the number of pseudo-sequences, the higher the expectation that the variable display result is a big hit. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern with normal reach (normally dislocated, pseudo-recurring 1 normal misplaced, per normal and per simulated reciprocal 1 normal) is the variation pattern with super reach (super dislocated, pseudo reciprocated 2-super deviated) The result of the variable display is more likely to be selected as "off" than in the case where the pseudo run 3 super deviates, the hit per super, the pseudo run 2 super (per pseudo run 3 super)). Conversely, the variation pattern with super reach (super off, pseudo rerun 2 super, pseudo rerun 3 super, per super, pseudo rerun 2 super and pseudo rerun 3 super) is the fluctuation pattern with normal reach (normal fall The pseudo-repeat 1 normal is deviated, the normal display and the pseudo-repeat 1 normal) are more likely to be selected when the variable display result is “normally big hit” or “probably variable big hit”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with super reach has a higher expectation that the variable display result is a big hit than the fluctuation pattern with normal reach.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is set to “suddenly probability change big hit” or “small hit” (“sudden probability change big hit / small hit” field in FIG. 13), The variation pattern is determined to be "special hit".

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed in ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 10, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the effect pattern and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. In this embodiment, the microcomputer for controlling game control 560 determines which variation pattern is to be set at the time of start winning in the effect processing for winning (see FIG. 20) to be described later (see FIG. 20). Then, a value for designating the fluctuation pattern as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the prize determination result specification result command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the content of the winning determination result specification command. As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, a value is set to the EXT data according to which variation pattern is determined at the start winning combination, and a winning determination determination result designation command is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is "shortening non-reach out" at the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, a winning judgment result specifying command in which "01 (H)" is set to the EXT data is transmitted. Be done. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is "special hit" at the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, a winning judgment result specifying command in which "13 (H)" is set to the EXT data is transmitted. Be done. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "shortened non-reach out" at the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a winning judgment result specifying command in which "21 (H)" is set in the EXT data Is sent. Further, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is "special hit" at the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, the winning judgment result designated command in which "23 (H)" is set to the EXT data is transmitted. Be done.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A004 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, a sudden definite variation jackpot start designation command, and a small hit start designation command according to the type of jackpot. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for sudden probability big hit start designation suddenly when it is a definite odd hit, but not send the fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. It is also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A 301 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was usually a big hit with a production control command (big hit end 1 specified command: ending 1 specified command) is there. The command A 302 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was a definite variation big hit by the effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) is there. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. Although the gaming control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits an ending designation command for a definite odd jackpot end designation when it is a big hit, it is configured not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit Good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state specification command) for specifying that the gaming state is the time reduction state (does not include the probability change state). The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state specification command) for specifying that the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number designation command) for specifying the first pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first pending storage number. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number designation command) for specifying the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second pending storage number.

  The command D101 (H) is an effect control command (committee operation gate passing command) for designating that the gaming ball has passed through the bonus operation gate 33 after the display of the jackpot symbol. The command D102 (H) is an effect control command (display command during large winning opening open) for designating display that the special winning opening is open.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening (the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening) is executed. Be done. In the special symbol process processing, if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 13 is turned on, or the game ball is in the second starting winning opening 14 in the special symbol process processing If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting winning has been turned on, that is, if the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing processing Are executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped It is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to S304.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, when the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305A. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the effect pattern is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Initial big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305A), big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305B): It is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5, 6 respectively. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, the big winning opening opening pre-processing, control to open the big winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening (the first special winning opening or the second large winning opening)) is initialized and the solenoid 21a or 21b is driven. Then, the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The special winning opening opening pre-processing is performed for each round after the second round, but the first large winning opening opening pre-processing is performed in the first round. The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing to start the big hit game.

  Special winning opening open process (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming establishment of closing condition of the big winning opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S305B. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing (step S307): It is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening). Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening (the first special winning opening or the second large winning opening)) is initialized and the solenoid 21a or 21b is driven. Then, the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 (decimal) in this example) corresponding to step S309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every round, but when starting the first round, the small hit opening pre-processing is also a processing to start a small hit game.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 (decimal) in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the 1st starting opening switch 13a is not an ON state, it will transfer to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the order of winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13 a is turned on in the storage-preferring specific information storage area (pending specific area). When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 19A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 19A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 19A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 or 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 19B) (see FIG. Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a hardware R random number random number (big hit determination random number) and a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1 and fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted and stored. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning combination) and stored in advance in the storage area, but the variation of the first special symbol is stored. For example, in the variation pattern setting process described later, the value may be extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). May be extracted directly.

  FIG. 19B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 19B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), and fluctuation. A random number for pattern determination (random 3) is stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the first hold storage number counter, and thereafter, based on the determination result of the prize effect processing Control is performed to transmit the hour determination result specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1218).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S 1218 regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not), Every time the first start winning opening 13 gets a start winning, it always transmits both the first reserved storage number specifying command and the winning judgment determination result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. However, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, when it is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated, so the second special symbol The variable display may be performed with priority. In this case, the process of step S1215 can be omitted, and the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) shown in FIG. 19A becomes unnecessary. Further, in this case, the CPU 56 is not in the high base state (when the time saving flag is not set) and is not in the big hit game, and the winning time based on the starting winning in the first start winning opening 13 The effect processing (step S1217) may be performed. That is, when the condition is not satisfied, the execution of the winning a prize production process (step S1217) is limited, and a pre-reading effect (for details, for anticipating that the display result of the specific variable display becomes a big hit or a super reach) It may be made not to execute (described later). In the configuration where priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the gaming state where it is easy to get a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, the variation of the first special symbol based on the starting winning for the first start winning opening 13. Since the display may continue to be delayed, there is a possibility that even if the pre-reading effect is executed, the variable display of the advance notice object is not easily executed. However, by limiting the execution of the winning a prize production process (step S 1217), it is possible to prevent the first starting winning a prize port 13 from performing the pre-reading effect based on the starting prize winning, and such a state is avoided. be able to. In addition, by limiting the effect processing during winning in the high base state or the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a state where it is possible to recognize that the big hit storage is stored. In addition, it is confirmed by the value of the special symbol process flag, for example, whether or not a big hit game is being played. In that case, the CPU 56 determines that a big hit is in progress when the value of the special symbol process flag is any one of 5 to 8. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 side always performs a prize-time effect processing, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not a high base state and a big hit game are being performed, The execution of the pre-reading effect may be limited. Further, in the gaming control microcomputer 560 side, when in the high base state or in the big hit game, the execution of the prize at-a-time effect processing (that is, the pre-reading effect) based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13 is restricted. In the case of the configuration, in the high base state, only the pre-reading effect based on the start winning on the second start winning opening 14 can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 side, and in the low base state, the first start winning opening Only the pre-read effect based on the start-up winning at 13 can be made executable (that is, even in the low base state, the pre-read effect is given even if a command for determining the winning result based on the start-up winning is received at the second start winning opening 14 It may be decided not to execute).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1223). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1224) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 24B) (see FIG. Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a hardware R random number random number (big hit determination random number) or a big hit type determination random number (random 1) and fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) which are software random numbers are extracted, It is stored in the save area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second holding storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the second holding storage number counter, and thereafter, based on the determination result of the winning processing Control is performed to transmit the hour determination result specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1229).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S1229 regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not), Every time the second start winning opening 14 gets a start winning, it always transmits both the second reserved storage number specifying command and the winning judgment determination result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a prize-time effect process of steps S1217 and S1218. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance which fluctuation pattern will be obtained. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern is predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the production symbol is executed, and as described later, the jackpot or super by the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the judgment result at the time of winning. Execute pre-reading effect to predict that it will be reach.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set or not. It confirms (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a big change has occurred before, it has changed from the normal state to the big change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1217) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), the CPU 56 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in (B). In the case where there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1228) is executed in the starting opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hitting determination value set in the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) shown.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S224). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines in step S224 whether the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (specifically, whether the time short flag is set). A plurality of variable displays are executed from when it is confirmed in step S224 whether or not it is a definite change state or a time saving state at the start winning combination, and until the variable display based on the start winning combination is actually started. There is a possibility of Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S224 whether or not it is a definite change state or a time saving state at the start winning combination, and until the variable display based on the start winning combination is actually started (for example, If there is a probability change big hit before the start of the change, the normal state changes to the probability change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the start winning combination and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily coincide with each other.

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the CPU 56 selects the "out (time short)" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state, the "off" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is selected.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 selects the "Suddenly probability variation big hit / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. . (Step S226).

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of the big hit based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S227). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1217) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), the CPU 56 shown in FIG. Using the jackpot classification determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in (D), it is judged whether the jackpot classification is "normally big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In the case where there is a start winning on the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning at presentation processing (refer to step S1228) is executed in the starting opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. A big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown is used to determine whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit".

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type determined in step S227. (Step S228). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that “normal big hit” or “probably big hit”, the “normal big hit / probably big hit” field of the variation pattern determination table is selected. Also, if it is determined that "suddenly probability variation big hit", the "sudden probability variation big hit / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern using the fields of the variation pattern determination table set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 (step S229).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the determined fluctuation pattern in the winning determination result specifying command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 wins any value of “00 (H)” to “33 (H)” as shown in FIG. 16 according to which variation pattern is determined in step S229. A process is performed to set the EXT data of the hour determination result specification command.

  For example, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1217A is executed in the starting opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 18)), "not reach" in step S229. If it is determined that the variation pattern of "outside" will be obtained, "02 (H)" is passed to the EXT data of the winning determination result designated command consisting of MODE data "95 (H)" (starting port switch passing shown in FIG. In the case of executing the prize effect processing (see step S 1217 A) in the processing, processing for setting “22 (H)” is performed. If it is determined in step S 229 that the fluctuation pattern type is “pseudo ream 3 super”, it is 12 (H) as the EXT data of the winning time determination result specification command configured with MODE data “95 (H)”. ("32 (H)") is executed when the effect-on-prize processing (see step S1217A) is executed in the starting opening switch passing processing shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the same variation pattern determination table even if the number of pending storages is different, but a different variation pattern determination table may be used according to the number of pending storages. . In this case, regardless of the number of pending storages, for example, it is determined from the variation pattern determination random number (or the variation pattern type determination random number) whether or not a variation pattern with normal reach or super reach is obtained. It is also possible to transmit a winning judgment determination result specification command based on that, and it is determined that a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern for performing a specific reach effect, a fluctuation pattern of a specific number of pseudo sequences, etc.) At the same time, a winning determination result specifying command indicating a determination result may be transmitted. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not the display result is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, and a command indicating the determination result is used as a prize determination result specification command or separately from a prize determination result specification command You may make it transmit.

  21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the processing ends.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 19A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S54). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data representing "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data representing "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S53). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. For example, when priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is confirmed in step S52 whether or not the second pending storage number in the second pending storage number buffer is one or more, and one or more. For example, the process proceeds to step S54, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S53.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage number buffer. Then, it is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  When the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer in step S56, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a is based on the count value of the hold storage counter decremented. Alternatively, control is also performed to change the display of the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b.

  Then, after the CPU 56 stores the count value of the combined pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), the CPU 56 decreases the value of the combined pending storage number by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the pending storage number designation command of the special symbol pointer to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the value of the pending storage number counter of the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (Step S59). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first number of pending storage number designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (refer to FIG. 12) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing to decide to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is configured to be higher than in the non-probability change state (normal game state and time saving state) ing. Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 12A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of big hit determination values are changed with probability. A normal-time jackpot judgment table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 12A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When the gaming state or the time saving state, the processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at normal times. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 12A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit or sudden big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is reset at the timing.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 12B and 12C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), the CPU 56 determines to make a small hit regarding the special symbol. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 12B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 12C is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, which is extracted in step S214A of the first start mouth switch passage processing or in step S214B of the second start mouth switch passage processing. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Moreover, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301 in FIG. 17) (step S76).

  FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the “normal big hit / probably variable big hit” field of the variation pattern determination table if the big hit type is the normal big hit or the positive odds (Y in step S92). (Step S93) If the jackpot type is not a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit (N in Step S92), the "Suddenly Certainly Big Variation / Small Hit" field of the variation pattern determination table is selected (Step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the "suddenly probability variation big / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table (step S96). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S97). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state (including when the probability changing state is entered), and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a definite big hit or suddenly a big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, the timing of having saved the number of short time, or the variation of the special symbol when it is decided to be a big hit It is reset at the timing to finish the display and stop display the stop symbol. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "off (time saving)" field of the variation pattern determination table (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "out" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer) (step S101), and performs the processing of steps S93, S94, S96, S98 or S99. The variation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the field of the variation pattern determination table selected in (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Also, the variation of the special symbol is started (step S105). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S106). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302 in FIG. 17) (step S107).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302 in FIG. 17). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 14) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not. Further, when the type of the big hit is a definite positive big hit suddenly, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03" or not. Then, when it is neither the definite variation big hit nor the sudden variation big hit (in other words, it is usually the large hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S303 in FIG. 17) (step S119).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. During special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S121), and when the variation time timer times out (step S122), sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing in step S32. The variation of the special symbol is ended, and control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b (step S123). In addition, when the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the second symbol is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b is ended.

  Next, the CUP 56 sets the symbol determination time (step S124), and performs control to transmit the symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S125), and the special symbol process flag value is special symbol stop processing The value is updated to a value corresponding to (step S304 in FIG. 17) (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out (in the case of NO at step S122), the process ends.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the symbol determination time timer (step S131), and when the symbol determination time timer times out (YES in step S132), determines whether the big hit flag is set (step S133). When the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S133), the process proceeds to step S140.

  If the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S133), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is normally a jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is a definite variation big hit, send a big hit start 2 designated command. If the type of the jackpot is suddenly a definite oddity big hit, the sudden definite big hit start specification command is transmitted. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is usually a big hit, a definite big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) .

  The transmission of the jackpot start designation command causes the effect display device 9 to display the aiming of the combination operation gate 33 (for example, an arrow indicating the right side of the game area 7) by the effect control microcomputer 100. . In addition, when the big hit display is started by the big hit start specification command, the small arrow indicating that it aims at the work operation gate 33 is displayed, and the big hit display time has timed out in step S383 of FIG. A large arrow may be displayed to aim at the continuous operation gate 33. As described above, after the jackpot display is started, notification may be made to aim for the combination operating gate 33. Thus, the player can prepare to aim before the jackpot display time is timed out and the aim operation gate 33 is actually aimed.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit display control time (time for notifying, for example, that the occurrence of a big hit is permitted in the effect display device 9) in the big winning opening control timer (step S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305A in FIG. 17) (step S139).

  In step S140, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not a positive change flag indicating that it is a positive change state is set. If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). If the time saving flag is set (that is, if it is controlled only in the time saving state without a definite variation state), the value of the time saving counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time saving state 1 is performed (step S142).

  Next, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (in the case of YES at step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148).

  By the small hitting start designation command being transmitted, the effect display device 9 displays that a small hit has occurred by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening during the big hit or small hit (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (in the case of NO in step S147), CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) (step S152) .

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305A in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. Referring to FIG. 27, CPU 56 determines whether or not the combination operation gate passage waiting flag is set (step S381). The combination operation gate passage waiting flag is a flag indicating that the gaming ball is waiting to pass through the combination operation gate 33 after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  If it is determined that the team operation gate passage wait flag is not set (NO in step S 381), the CPU 56 displays the big hit display time (in the present embodiment, a time for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit is permitted and The special winning opening control timer, which measures the time until the invalidation period of the winning combination operation gate 33 ends, is decremented by 1 (step S382). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether the big winning opening control timer has timed out, that is, whether the big hit display time has elapsed (step S383). If it is determined that the big hit display time has not elapsed (NO in step S383), the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit display time has elapsed (YES in step S383), the CPU 56 sets a winning combination operation gate passage wait flag (step S384). After step S384, and when it is determined that the combination operation gate passage waiting flag is set (YES in step S381), the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33 or not (Step S391). If it is determined that it has not passed (NO in step S391), the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33 (YES in step S391), the CPU 56 resets the combination operation gate passage waiting flag (step S392), and resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag. (Step S393). Then, the CPU 56 sets the opening number counter (for example, 15 times for normal big hit or probability variation big hit, 2 times for sudden definite big hit) (step S394), and for combination control gate passing command for effect control Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S395).

  In addition, when the special winning opening control timer which measures the big hit display time has not timed out, that is, in the ineffective period of the combination operating gate 33 in which the detection of the passage of the combination operating gate 33 is not started, It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning combination operation gate 33, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed, the command for notifying that it is an invalid period of the winning combination activation gate 33 is a microcomputer for effect control When it is transmitted to 100 and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command, the effect display device 9 may display an indication that it is an invalid period of the winning combination operation gate 33.

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 21a to open the first big winning opening (the first special variable winning winning ball device 20a) (step S396), and the first big winning opening is open. The first big winning opening opening flag shown is set (step S397), and the number-of-openings counter is decremented by 1 (step S398). Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step S306 in FIG. 17) (step S399), and returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process in FIG. .

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening open preprocessing (step S305B) in the special symbol process processing. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer which measures an interval period described later (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S402), and if the value of the special winning opening control timer is not 0, the processing is ended. In addition, an interval period means the period between each round after the period between the 1st round (first round) and the 2nd round.

  When the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the CPU 56 designates the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the special winning opening (during a round). Control is performed to send the winning opening open designation command (A1XX (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S403). The CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the opening number counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 sets a first large winning opening opening flag indicating that the first large winning opening is in the open state or a second large winning opening opening flag indicating that the second large winning opening is in the opening state. It is checked whether or not it is present (step S404), and if none of them is set, the first large winning opening opening flag is set (step S406a). Also, if one of them is set, and the first large winning opening opening flag is not set (N in step S405), that is, if the second large winning opening opening flag is set, the second large The winning opening opening flag is reset, and the first large winning opening opening flag is set (step S408). Then, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21a to open the first special winning opening (the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a) (step S407). On the other hand, if the first large winning opening opening flag is set in step S405 (ie, the second large winning opening opening flag is not set), the first large winning opening opening flag is reset, and the second large winning combination A mouth open flag is set (step S408). Then, the solenoid 21b is driven to open the second special winning opening (the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b) (step S409).

  In this embodiment, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are alternately opened, and which large winning opening is open is the first large winning opening opening flag and the second large winning opening open. It is grasped by the state with the flag. The state determined that the first large winning opening opening flag is set in step S405 is the first large winning opening as the next round since the first large winning opening is opened in the previous round. The mouth opening flag is reset, the second big winning opening open flag is set, and control to open the second big winning opening is performed. In addition, in the state where it is determined in step S404 that neither the first large winning opening open flag nor the second large winning opening open flag is set, there is a big hit game in which any large winning opening has not yet been opened. Since it is in the started state, as the first round, the first large winning opening opening flag is set, and the control to open the first large winning opening is performed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the release number counter by 1 (step S410). Further, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the special winning opening can be opened in each round is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S411). For example, in the case of a 15 round big hit, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of a sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during step big winning opening opening (step S306) (step S412).

  FIGS. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening open process (step S306) in the special symbol process process. In the special winning opening open process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer by 1 (step S420).

  Then, CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). If the value of the special winning opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are turned on (step S432), and the first count switch 23a and the second count switch If 23b is not turned on, the process ends. When the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning balls of the gaming ball to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number, the processing is ended. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first large winning opening open flag is set. (Step S435a) If set, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21a to close the first large winning opening (Step S435b), and if not set, ie, the second large winning opening is opened If the flag is set, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21b to close the second big winning opening (step S435c). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the release number counter (step S438). If the value of the number-of-openings counter is not 0 (in the case of NO in step S438), the CPU 56 specifies the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the special winning opening (after the end of the round) Control is performed to transmit the post-designation command (A2XX (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of a round to the start of the next round is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is a special winning opening The value is updated according to the pre-opening process (step S305B) (step S441). The interval period set in step S440 is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden big hit or small hit, the period may be shorter than 15R big hit. Also, in step S440, for example, the interval period is set to a very short time (for example, 1 second) in the case of 15R big hit, and is set to a longer period in the case of sudden definite big hit or small hit. It is also good. By doing this, in the case of the 15R big hit, it is possible to shorten the period from when the first large winning opening is controlled to the closed state to when the second large winning opening is controlled to the open state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball which has reached the first large winning opening at the timing when the first large winning opening is controlled to be closed, is not taken into the out opening 26 and the second large winning opening can be won. In addition, we make interval period when we change object to control to open state from the second big winning opening to the first big winning opening shorter than interval period when we change from the first big winning opening to the second big winning opening You may configure it. By configuring as such, it is possible to suppress the occurrence ratio of the situation where the gaming ball does not win any of the big winning openings.

  If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (YES in step S438), the CPU 56 resets one of the first large winning opening opening flag and the second large winning opening opening flag (the one that has been set) ( Step S442) The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit end process (step S307 in FIG. 17) (step S443).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is a big hit, it sends a big hit end 1 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit, it sends a big hit end 2 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit suddenly, a small hit / suddenly Send a definite variation big hit end specification command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  As in the case of the small hit shown in FIG. 63 (B) and FIG. 63 (C) described later, in the case of a big hit, the big hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds in the low base case, and the high base If it is set to 1.1 seconds. The effect control microcomputer 100, upon receiving the small hit / probable big hit end designation command, executes the effect that can be performed within 12.3 seconds if the base is low, and 1.1 seconds if the base is high. Execute a feasible effect within.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of the big hit is a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit (step S166). In addition, whether it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03” It can judge by confirming. If neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit (that is, usually a big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter for counting the time reduction number (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time saving state designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S169). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

  If the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time saving flag (step S171). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S172). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

  In this embodiment, the short time flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or to increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag is set when the variation display result of the normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol process processing (see step S27). If it is, control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 15 by lengthening the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. In addition, the short time flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not the variation time of the special symbol is to be shortened.

  Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) (step S173).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing small hit opening pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. Referring to FIG. 32, CPU 56 subtracts one from the special winning opening control timer measuring the small hit display time (first round) or interval period (after second round) (step S2461), and special winning opening control It is determined whether the timer has timed out (step S2462).

  When it is determined that the special winning opening control timer has not timed out, that is, the small hit display time or the interval period has not elapsed (NO in step S2462), the CPU 56 performs the processing to be executed as the special symbol process shown in FIG. Back to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special winning opening control timer has timed out, that is, the small hit display time or interval period has elapsed (YES in step S2462), the CPU 56 determines whether the first large winning opening open flag is set. It is determined whether or not (step S2463).

  If it is determined that the first large winning opening opening flag is not set, that is, the first round of the small hit, or the next round when the second large winning opening is opened (NO in step S2463), the CPU 56 It is determined whether the second big winning opening open flag is set (step S2464). If it is determined that the flag is set (YES in step S2464), the CPU 56 resets a second large winning opening opening flag (step S2465).

  If it is determined that the second large winning opening opening flag is not set (NO in step S2464), and after step S2465, the CPU 56 sets the first large winning opening opening flag (step S2466), and the solenoid 21a is selected. To open the first special winning opening (the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a) (step S2467).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first large winning opening opening flag is set, that is, the next round in which the first large winning opening is opened (YES in step SS2463), the CPU 56 selects the first large winning opening. The open flag is reset (step S2468), the second large winning opening open flag is set (step S2469), and the solenoid 21a is driven to open the second large winning opening (second special variable winning ball device 20b) (Step S2470).

  After the step S2467 and the step S2470, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S2471). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0. Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the small hit opening time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special winning opening control timer (step S2472), and subtracts 1 from the opening number counter (step S2473). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S309 in FIG. 17) (step S2474).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing small hit open processing (step S309 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. Referring to FIG. 33, CPU 56 subtracts one from the large winning opening control timer measuring the small hit opening time (step S2481), and determines whether the special winning opening control timer has timed out (step S2482). .

  If it is determined that the special winning opening control timer has not timed out, that is, the small hit opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S2482), the CPU 56 turns on the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b. It is judged whether or not it becomes (step S2483), and when it is judged that it is turned on (YES in step S2483), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2484).

  After step S2484, and when it is determined that the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are not in the on state (NO in step S2483), the CPU 56 determines that the value of the winning number counter has reached 10, That is, it is determined whether or not the number of winning combinations of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening has reached 10 (step S2485).

  The value of the winning number counter has not reached 10, that is, the small hit opening time has not elapsed, and the winning number of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening has not reached 10 (step S2485) If the CPU 56 determines that the result is “NO”, the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the special winning opening control timer has timed out, or the value of the winning number counter has reached 10, that is, the small hit opening time has elapsed, or the winning number of the first large winning opening, the second large winning opening Is determined to be 10 (YES in step S2482 or step S2485), the CPU 56 stops the drive of the solenoids 21a and 21b and the first big winning opening (the first special variable winning ball device 20a) or the second Control is performed to close the open one of the special winning opening (the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b) (step S2486).

  If it is determined that the number of winning prizes for the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening has reached 10 at the first opening (YES in step S2485), the value of the special symbol process flag is processed for small hitting end processing The value may be updated to a value corresponding to (step S310 in FIG. 17), and the process may be advanced to the small hitting end process.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether the value of the opening number counter has become 0 (step S2489). If it is determined that a small hit round is left (NO in step S2489), a value corresponding to the interval period is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S2490), and the special symbol process flag The value is updated to a value corresponding to small hit opening pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) (step S2491), and the process to be performed is returned to the special symbol process processing in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-openings counter has become 0, that is, there are no small hits remaining (YES in step S2489), the first large winning opening open flag and the second large winning opening open flag The one that has been set is reset (step S2492), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hitting end process (step S310 in FIG. 17) (step S2493), and the process to be executed is illustrated. Return to 17 special symbol processing.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (step S310 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. Referring to FIG. 34, CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit end display timer is set or not (step S2160).

  If it is determined that the small hit end display timer is not set (NO in step S2160), the CPU 56 resets the small hit flag (step S2161), and performs control to transmit a small hit / rough probability big hit end designation command ( Step S2162) The small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (small hit end display time) during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (step S2163). Process is returned to the special symbol process process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (B) and FIG. 63 (C) described later, the small hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds in the low base case and 1.1 seconds in the high base case. Ru. The effect control microcomputer 100, upon receiving the small hit / probable big hit end designation command, executes the effect that can be performed within 12.3 seconds if the base is low, and 1.1 seconds if the base is high. Execute a feasible effect within.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit end display timer is set (YES in step S2160), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer (step S2164), and the value of the small hit end display timer is It is determined whether it becomes 0, that is, the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2165). If it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in step S2165), the process to be performed is returned to the special symbol process process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step S2165), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) ( Step S2166), the process to be executed is returned to the special symbol process of FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the terminal substrate 160. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main substrate 31 transmits a start opening signal, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal, and a symbol determination frequency 2 signals to the terminal substrate 160. A big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a big hit 3 signal, a short time signal, a security signal and a high probability medium signal are outputted by the information output process on the side of the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S29 in FIG. 9). Further, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control substrate 37 passes the main substrate 31 to the terminal substrate 160 for the winning ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error status signal. Are output by the information output process on the payout control microcomputer 370 side.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error state signal inputted from the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched on the main substrate 31 without being inputted to the game control microcomputer 560. Although the case where it is input to the terminal substrate 160 as it is is shown, it may be configured to be input to the terminal substrate 160 via the game control microcomputer 560.

  The starting opening signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The symbol determination number 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of changes of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The symbol determination number 2 signal is a signal for notifying only the variation number of the first special symbol. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that a jackpot game is in progress. In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal is output only when a jackpot game is being played, and is not output when a small hit game is being played. The jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are signals for notifying that a jackpot game or a small hit game is being played. The short time signal is a signal for notifying that it is a big hit state and that the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is in operation (during short time state).

  The security signal is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, based on the detection result of the second start opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b, when it is determined that the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the security signal is It is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). Also, when the game machine is powered on and initialization processing is performed, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  Note that the signal externally output as a security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only the abnormal winning on the second start winning opening 14 but also the abnormal winning on the large winning opening or the first start winning opening 13 may be detected and externally output as a security signal. In addition, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a game machine, or when an abnormal radio wave is detected by a radio wave sensor provided in the game machine, an external output can be made as a security signal. It is also good. Also, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in a game machine is detected (for example, when occurrence of a short circuit or the like is detected by determining that an input value exceeds a threshold), external output is possible. It may be configured as follows. In this way, even a signal line can be connected by configuring the external connector as the security signal from the common connector CN7 of the terminal board 160 also for abnormal winning to the special winning opening, abnormal magnetic error and abnormal radio error. If this is done, error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load for error detection can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 is selected based on the number of detections by the second start opening switch 14a and the number of detections by the prize confirmation switch 14b being equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10). It is determined that the abnormal winning has occurred, and the security signal is output to the outside. For example, it is assumed that the value of the normal symbol process flag used in the normal symbol process processing is during the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 If the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a when the value is not the value shown, it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred, and the security signal is output externally. It is also good.

  The high probability medium signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state (probable change state). In this embodiment, the high-assurance medium signal is externally output through the terminal substrate 160 until a predetermined condition is satisfied after power failure recovery (specifically, until the first big hit occurs).

  Also, the prize ball signal 1 is a signal that is output each time one prize ball payout is detected. Further, the gaming machine error status signal is a signal indicating that the gaming machine is in an error status (in this example, a ball out error status or a full tank error status). It should be noted that instead of externally outputting the prize ball signal 1 every time one prize ball payout is detected, some kind of prize ball signal is output each time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize ball payouts are detected. It is also good.

  36 to 39 are flowcharts showing the information output process of step S29. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, steps S1002 to S1030 are processes for outputting the starting opening signal, and steps S1031 to S1036 are processes for outputting one symbol determination number signal, and steps S1037 to S1042 are processes for outputting the symbol determination frequency 2 signal, and steps S1050 to S1064 are processes for outputting the big hit 1 signal, the big hit 2 signal, the big hit 3 signal and the short time signal. Further, steps S1069 to S1074 are processes for outputting a security signal, and steps S1075 to S1077 are processes for outputting a high probability medium signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1001). Then, the address of the starting opening information setting table is set to the pointer (step S1002), and the number of processing indicated by the pointer is loaded (step S1003). In the start port information setting table, the processing number (= 2) and two start port switch input bits (first start port switch input bit determination value (01 (H)) and second start port switch input bit determination value (02 (H))) is set. The first start opening switch input bit determination value is a determination value for determining the presence or absence of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the second start opening switch input bit determination value is a second determination value. It is a determination value for determining the presence or absence of the start winning to the start winning opening 14. In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the processing number of the starting opening information setting table, data of the processing number (= 2) in the starting opening information setting table is loaded.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch on buffer as switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed by the pointer is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the start port switch input bit and switch input data are ANDed (step S1008). In this case, when the processing number is 1, the first start port switch input bit is loaded to take the logical product of the switch input data, and when the processing number is 2, the second start port switch input The bits will be loaded and the switch input data will be ANDed. When the processing number is 1 and the first start port switch 13a is on, the result of the logical product operation becomes 01 (H). In addition, when the processing number is 2 and the second start port switch 14a is on, the calculation result of the logical product is 02 (H). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are not turned on, the calculation result of the logical product is 00 (H).

  If the operation result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the calculation result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 has won, and the starting opening information storage counter is loaded into the register (Step S1010). The starting opening information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the starting opening signal (that is, the number of remaining winning combinations of starting winning not yet output). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the starting opening information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is checked whether the operation result (the result of addition) is not 0 (step S1012). When the operation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the operation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the starting opening information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not zero (step S1016). If the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. In this embodiment, since the gaming machine is provided with the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, 2 is set as the initial value of the processing number, and the processing of steps S1004 to S1016 is 2 It will be executed once.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 loads the starting opening information storage timer (step S1017), and reflects the state of the starting opening information storage timer in the flag register. Then (step S1018), it is determined whether or not the starting opening signal is being output (step S1019). The starting opening information storage timer is a timer for measuring the on time and off time (for example, on time 200 ms and off time 200 ms) of the starting opening signal. If the value of the starting opening information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the starting opening signal is being output, and if the value of the starting opening information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the starting opening signal is not being output.

  If the starting opening signal is being output (Y in step S1019), the process proceeds to step S1026. If the starting opening signal is not being output (N in step S1019), the CPU 56 loads the starting opening information storage counter (step S1020) and reflects the state of the starting opening information storage counter in the flag register (step S1021) It is determined whether there is a remaining number of times of output of the starting opening signal (step S1022). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on (N in step S1009), the start port information storage counter is added (the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a If one of them is turned on, 1 is added, and if both are turned on, 2 is added), it is determined that there is the remaining number of times of output of the starting opening signal.

  If there is no remaining number of times of output of the starting opening signal (Y in step S1022), the process proceeds to step S1031. If there is the remaining number of output times of the starting opening signal (N in step S1023), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the starting opening information storage counter (step S1023), and the calculation result (the result of subtracting 1) is obtained from the starting opening information storage counter (Step S1024). Then, the winning information operation time (100) is set in the register (step S1025). The winning information operation time (100) is a time in which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.400 seconds (400 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the starting opening information storage timer if the winning information operation time is not set in step S1025, and subtracts 1 from the winning information operation time if the winning information operation time is set in step S1025. (Step S1026). Then, the operation result (the result of subtracting 1) is stored in the starting opening information storage timer (step S1027).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (50) (step S1029), and determines whether the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S1030). The winning information on time (50) is a time for which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  If the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, if the calculation result (remaining time of the starting opening 1 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1029) And the CPU 56 sets the starting opening output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) (step S1030). When the start opening output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the start opening signal is output port 1 by outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S1103. Will be output from

  Through the processing of steps S1001 to S1030 described above, winning on the first starting winning opening 13 (turning on the first starting opening switch 13a), winning on the second starting winning opening 14 (turning on the second starting opening switch 14a) When is generated, the start port signal is output. That is, after the starting opening signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting the starting opening signal to the hall computer, the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 can be recognized.

  The start opening signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms. Therefore, even if the start winning combination occurs continuously for a short time, the next start opening after the off state for 200 ms. A signal is output. That is, the starting opening signal is output at intervals of at least 200 ms.

  As described above, since the starting opening signal is outputted at intervals of at least 200 ms, the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of starting winnings.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the status of the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1033). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see step S303), when the variation time is timed out, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 1 information timer outputs the symbol determination number (in this example) 0.500 seconds) is set, and when the symbol determination frequency output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer has not timed out and the symbol determination frequency output time has elapsed (symbol determination It is determined that the symbol determination number 1 information timer has timed out when the value of the number 1 information timer is 0).

  If the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination frequency 1 information timer (step S1035) . Then, the symbol determination frequency 1 output bit position (bit 1 of output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) of the information buffer is set (step S1036). When the symbol fixed number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set as an output value in the subsequent step S 1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S 1103. Are output from the output port 1 (turned on). When the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the processing in step S1036 is not executed, so that the symbol determination number 1 signal is turned off.

  Every time the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped (stop symbol is decided) by the processing of steps S1031 to S1036 shown above, the symbol decision number 1 signal is the symbol decided number output time (for example, 500 ms) It will be on.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer into the register (step S1037) and reflects the state of the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer in the flag register (step S1038), and the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1039). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see step S303), if the data indicating the "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (that is, if the first special symbol variation display is performed) For example, when the fluctuation time has timed out, when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the symbol fixed frequency output time (0.500 seconds in this example) is set in the symbol fixed frequency 2 information timer, and the symbol fixed frequency output time When has not passed, it is determined that the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer has not timed out, and the symbol determination frequency output time has elapsed (when the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer value is 0), the symbol determination It is determined that the number 2 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1039), the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1040), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination frequency 2 information timer (step S1041) . Then, the symbol determination frequency 2 output bit position (bit 2 of output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) of the information buffer is set (step S1042). When the symbol determination frequency 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set as an output value in the subsequent step S 1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S 1103. Are output from the output port 1 (turned on). When the symbol determination number 2 information timer times out (Y in step S1039), the symbol determination number 2 signal is turned off as a result of the processing in step S1042 not being executed.

  By the processing of steps S1037 to S1042 shown above, every time the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (the stopped symbol is determined), the symbol determination number 2 signal becomes the symbol determination number output time (for example, 500 ms) ON state.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1050), and compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the first large winning opening opening pre-processing designated value ("5") (step S1051), the special symbol process It is determined whether the value of the flag is less than 5 (step S1052). If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1052), the process proceeds to step S1057. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1052), the value of the special symbol process flag is further compared with the small hit opening pre-processing designated value ("9") (step S1053), the special symbol It is determined whether the value of the process flag is 9 or more (step S1054). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 9 or more (Y in step S1054), the process proceeds to step S1057. If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 9 (N in step S1054), the jackpot 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1055). When the big hit 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S 1102, and the big hit 1 signal is output port 1 by outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S 1103. Output (turns on).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a time saving check process to confirm whether or not the time saving state is set (step S1057), and determines whether or not the time saving state is set (step S1058). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time saving state is established by checking whether the time saving flag set when transitioning to the time saving state is set. When the time saving state is set (Y in step S1058), the time saving output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1059). When the short time output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the short time signal is output from the output port 1 by outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S1103. (Turned on).

  The CPU 56 also loads the special symbol process flag (step S1060), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the first large winning opening opening pre-processing designated value ("5") (step S1061), and the special symbol process flag It is determined whether the value of is less than 5 (step S1062). If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1062), the process proceeds to step S1069. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1062), the jackpot 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1063), and the jackpot 3 output bit position is set (step S1064). When the big hit 2 output bit position and the big hit 3 output bit position are set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S 1102, and the big hit 2 signal and the big hit are output by outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S 1103. The jackpot 3 signal is output from the output port 1 (turns on).

  By the processing of steps S1050 to S1064 described above, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal and a short time signal are output (turned on) according to the jackpot type and the game state.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the security signal information timer (step S1069), reflects the state of the security signal information timer in the flag register (step S1070), and determines whether the security signal information timer has timed out (step S1070) S1071). In this embodiment, it is determined that the detection difference between the second starting opening switch 14a and the winning a prize confirmation switch 14b has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more, and it is determined that an abnormal winning on the starting winning opening has occurred. If the predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (switch normality / abnormality check process executed in the switch process of FIG. 9) and the predetermined time has not elapsed Is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), it is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization process is executed, the security signal information timer is set to a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example), and the predetermined time is set. When it is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has passed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), the security signal information timer has timed out. It is judged.

  If the security signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1071), the security signal information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1072), and the operation result is stored in the security signal information timer (step S1073). Then, the security signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 7 of output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) is set (step S1074). When the security signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1102 and the security signal is output from output port 1 by outputting the output value to output port 1 in step S1103 It is output (turned on). When the security signal information timer times out (Y in step S1071), the processing in step S1074 is not executed, and as a result, the security signal is turned off.

  The initialization process is executed until four minutes have elapsed since the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected by the processing of steps S1069 to S1074 described above, or when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The security signal is output using the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 until 30 seconds have elapsed. When a new abnormal prize is detected during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is continued until four minutes have elapsed since the final detection of the abnormal prize.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability medium output permission flag is set (step S1075). Note that the high-probability middle output permission flag is set when the power failure recovery process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine. If the high probability medium output permission flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step S1076). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the high / low probability signal output bit position (bit 7 of the output port 0 in the example shown in FIG. 5) of the information buffer (step S1077). When the high confidence middle signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the high confidence signal is set by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 0 in step S1103. Output from output port 0 (turned on). In this embodiment, if the first big hit occurs after the power failure is restored, the high-probability middle output permission flag is reset (refer to step S393 in FIG. 29), and as a result, the high-probability middle signal is off. Become.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the high probability medium output permission flag is reset when the first big hit occurs, the timing at which the high probability medium output permission flag is reset is the same as in this embodiment. It is not limited to what was shown. For example, it may be configured to reset the high probability medium output permission flag also when a small hit occurs. Further, for example, when the definite change state is configured to end based on the fact that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times after being controlled to the definite change state, the predetermined number of times of the variable display is ended and the definite change state is It may be configured to reset the high probability medium output permission flag when it is finished.

  After the power failure is recovered by the processing of steps S1075 to S1077 described above, if the probability change flag is set, a high probability medium signal is generated until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, until the first big hit occurs). Is output (turned on). That is, in this embodiment, as described above, even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the certainty flag is held in the backup RAM for a predetermined period. Therefore, if it is controlled to the definite change state before the power failure occurs, the positive RAM flag is kept in the backup RAM, so the high probability medium signal output is started at the time of the power failure recovery and the first big hit occurs The output of the high probability medium signal is continued until this time.

  In this embodiment, since the high probability medium output permission flag is reset when the first big hit occurs (see step S393 in FIG. 29), the output of the high probability medium signal is subsequently performed. It disappears. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present example, if the first big hit occurs), the output of the high confidence medium signal is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, only the process of setting the high-probability middle output permission flag at the time of execution of the power failure recovery process of the main process is performed, and it is confirmed whether the probability change flag is set in the information output process of step S29. Although the case has been shown where the processing is performed to output the high confidence medium signal, the method of processing the high confidence medium signal output is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the power failure recovery processing of the main processing, and if it is set, the high / low probability signal output bit position of the information buffer is set Processing such as setting a timer may be performed to output a high-probability middle signal. And, even in the case where a high probability signal output is started by confirming the probability change flag in the power failure recovery process as described above, the high condition is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the first big hit occurs. Control may be performed to stop the output of the in-progress signal, and thereafter, control may be performed so as not to output the in-progress in-progress signal.

  In this embodiment, the output bit position of the corresponding signal in the information output process shown in FIGS. 36 to 39 is set for each timer interruption (steps S1030, S1036, S1042, S1055, S1059, S1063, S1064). , S1074 and S1077), and steps S1102 and S1103 are executed to externally output from output ports 0 and 1. However, regarding the output state of each signal, the value of the corresponding output bit is set to the previous value. It does not change unless it changes. For example, if the value of the corresponding output bit is set to "1", then the signal will continue to be output while it is being set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 14 and FIG. 15) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  42 to 43 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 stores the change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S623).

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol determination designating command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number specification command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 performs first hold storage of the second byte data (EXT data) of the first hold storage number specification command The number is stored in the first reserved storage number storage area as a number (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number specification command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 performs second hold storage of the second byte data (EXT data) of the second hold storage number specification command. The number is stored in the second reserved storage number storage area as a number (step S655).

  Next, if the received effect control command is any winning determination result designation command (step S664), the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result according to the received winning determination result designation command. The result storage buffer is stored in an area associated with the total number of pending storages (step S665), and pre-reading effect determination processing is performed (step S671). In addition, when the presence or fluctuation pattern of the big hit is determined at the starting winning combination and the determination result is configured to be transmitted by different commands, it is transmitted based on the determination processing at the starting winning combination in step S664. By checking whether or not all the commands have been received, it is possible to determine whether or not the command transmission / reception processing is normally performed.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the total pending storage number is stored in the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area and the second pending storage number storage area. It is obtained by summing up with the second reserved storage number being stored. The first pending storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first pending storage number specification command, and the second pending storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second pending storage number specification command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. In addition, at the step S1218 of starting opening switch passing processing, the winning a prize decision result designated command is transmitted after sending the 1st pending memory number designated command, and in the step S1228, the 2nd pending memory number designated command was sent. Will be sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the prize determination result specification command after updating the total number of pending storages. In the process of step S665, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, the second byte data of the winning determination determination result designation command in the saving determination result buffer in the storage area associated with the total number of pending storages. This is because the winning determination result is specified by the second byte data (EXT data) of the winning determination determination result designation command (see FIG. 16). Further, the data set in the prize determination result storage buffer is deleted in order from the one set first in the effect symbol variation start process (the timing when the process of step S1800 is executed, etc.) described later. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 manages the first hold memory number, the second hold memory number, and the total hold memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the game control microcomputer 560. The first number of pending storages, the second number of pending storages, and the total number of pending storages are recognized based on the command specifying the first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages, and the number of pending storages recognized Is used for the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100. That is, although the total suspension storage number used by the effect control microcomputer 100 has the same name as the total suspension storage number managed by the gaming control microcomputer 560, it is managed by the gaming control microcomputer 560. The total number of pending storages is not used as it is, but is recognized based on a command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (winning determination result storage buffer) for storing the winning determination result. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, eight storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are secured in the winning determination result storage buffer. Moreover, in this embodiment, based on the determination result of winning, it is a normal mode that the pending display corresponding to the identified variable indication is that the variable indication specified by the determination result of winning may become a big hit. By changing and displaying the display mode other than the above, the pre-reading effect for giving notice is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 44, as data relating to the preread effect that can be associated with the winning determination result (that is, the fluctuation display specified by the winning judgment and the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuation display specified) , A pending display mode indicating the display mode of the current pending display, a final display mode indicating which display mode is to be finally changed and displayed according to the pre-reading effect, and a pre-reading effect pattern indicating the pattern of the pre-reading effect to be executed And a shift number counter indicating the timing at which the pending display changes when the pre-reading effect is executed (in this example, the number of times the pending display changes at this timing) and the display mode of the pending display may change Suggestive effect mode (in the example shown in FIG. 44, indicative effect mode executed at the timing when the hold display changes) It is shown.

  The data set in the prize determination result storage buffer is deleted in order from the one set in the effect pattern start process described later (such as the timing when the process of step S1800 is executed), and the corresponding hold display is also made Shifted and displayed at the same time. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the effect symbol variation start process (to be executed at step S1800, etc.) is performed once, the data set in the prize determination result storage buffer is , Transition to the state shown in FIG. Further, when the effect symbol variation start process (the timing when the process of step S1800 is executed, etc.) is performed twice, the data set in the in-winning determination result storage buffer shifts to the state shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, since it is specified whether the determination result at the time of winning is based on the first start winning or the second starting winning, the first start in the process of step S67111 described later. Display the hold display based on the win and the hold display based on the second start winning in different display modes (for example, the hold display based on the first start winning is displayed in red and the hold display based on the second start win in blue It may be displayed.

  In addition, in the case where it is configured that priority is given to one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display is executed, in order to distinguish which of the winning determination results, The first winning combination determination result storage buffer for storing the winning determination result at the starting winning combination to the first starting winning opening 13, and the second determination result at the starting winning combination for the second start winning opening 14 A prize determination result storage buffer may be prepared. In this case, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first prize determination result storage buffer. Further, in the second prize determination result storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. Further, in this case, the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer store EXT data of the received determination determination result command at the time of winning. The winning determination result storage buffer (first winning determination result storage buffer and second winning determination result storage buffer) is formed in the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S683). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  Next, the pre-reading effect will be described. The preread effect is executed before the variable display to be the target of the presentation is started, and the variable display to be the target of the presentation becomes a big hit or becomes a specific fluctuation (for example, including the reach effect) It is a notice effect to notice that. In this embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, a display mode different from the normal display mode (hereinafter, the normal mode) in the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be notified. An effect to be displayed by being changed to (a special mode or a first special mode or a second special mode described later) is performed.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing pre-reading effect determination processing. In the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is larger than 1 (step S67101). In this embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the total pending storage number is stored in the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area and the second pending storage number storage area. It is obtained by summing up with the second reserved storage number being stored. If the total number of pending storages is not larger than 1, the effect control CPU 101 causes the total pending storage display unit 18c to display the new pending display corresponding to the latest pending storage in the normal mode (step S67111). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode. . In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display is changed as the pre-reading effect is limited to the timing at which the hold display is shifted. Even if the effect is not executed, but it is permitted to change the display mode (or display from the beginning in a display mode other than the normal mode) as a pre-reading effect even at the starting winning combination, the total number of pending storages is also 1 Since the pre-reading effect can be executed, the process of step S67101 is omitted. In addition, even when execution of pre-reading effect is permitted even when the total number of pending storages is 1, pre-reading based on, for example, a second pre-reading effect pattern described later (the display mode of the on-hold display changes twice) It may be limited that the presentation is performed.

  If the total number of pending storages is greater than 1, the effect control CPU 101 determines the latest winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result indicated in the winning determination result specification command received this time) It extracts (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the advance effect based on the extracted determination result at the time of winning (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is changing the hold display to a display mode other than the normal mode (that is, the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory view of a pre-reading effect execution determination table. Although the determination value corresponding to the determination item (“Perform pre-reading effect” or “Do not perform pre-reading effect”) is assigned to the pre-reading effect execution determination table for each winning determination result, the example shown in FIG. 46 Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“execute the pre-reading effect” or “Do not execute preread effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 46, the numerical values corresponding to “execute pre-read effect” and “do not execute pre-read effect” in each winning determination result are “execute pre-read effect” or “pre-read effect” as the determination item. It shows the rate (%) that "do not execute the effect" is selected.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46, the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A), and the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and (C). The judgment values are actually assigned to the prefetching effect change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52, but the judgment assigned to simplify the explanation. The percentage of values is shown. In addition, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, and S67110, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, similarly to step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 determines, for example, the final display mode, the prefetch effect pattern, the change timing (number of shifts) or The random number for determining the production | presentation aspect of suggestion production is extracted, and it is determined as the matter to which the judgment value which corresponds to the extracted random number is allocated.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 causes the pre-reading effect execution determination table (when the pending display changing flag is not set) shown in FIG. 46 (A) or FIG. 46 (B) according to the state of the pending display change flag. The pre-reading effect execution decision table (when the pending display change flag is set) to be shown is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines, based on the extracted latest prize determination result, whether or not to execute the prefetch effect at a rate determined for each prize determination result in the selected prefetch effect execution determination table. Do. For example, when the winning determination result indicates that "shortening non-reach is lost", the effect control CPU 101 does not execute the pre-reading effect at a rate of 100% regardless of the state of the pending display changing flag. Decide. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that “per simulated ream 3 supermarkets” is determined in the winning determination result, and the prefetch display effect is performed at a rate of 99% when the pending display changing flag is not set. Is determined to be executed, and when the on-hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the pre-read effect at a rate of 50%.

  46. The characteristic thing in the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the display result is “off” (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 (21) specification to the winning determination result 7 (27) specification) If the display result is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 (28) specification to the winning determination result 12 (32) specification), the look-ahead effect is executed The determination value is set so as to increase the ratio. In addition, it is characteristic in the look-ahead effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 46 that even if the display result is the same, the one with reach expectation with a high degree of expectation is performed (for example, the one with super reach than the normal reach) The determination value is set such that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is high. By providing such a feature, when pre-reading effect is executed, it is expected that the rate of occurrence of big hit in the variable display of the advance notice object is increased and the big hit is expected as compared with the case where pre-reading effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the rate at which reach effect with a high degree is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the preread effect is executed.

  Also, it is characteristic in the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46 that the pending display changing flag is set (that is, in the total pending storage display unit 18c, any pending display is other than the normal mode). In the display mode, when the pending display changing flag is not set (in other words, no pending display is displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode in the total suspension storage display unit 18c). The determination value is set so that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is lower than when (1). By providing such a feature, when any hold display is already displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the pre-reading effect is rarely newly executed. Therefore, for example, when the suggestion effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change is executed, the hold displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode than the hold display displayed in the normal mode The rate at which the display mode of display changes further can be increased (that is, the display mode is changed from the special mode to the special mode by the pre-reading effect (details will be described later) based on the second pre-reading effect pattern started earlier Rate can be increased). Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided as display modes of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode, and the expectation for becoming a big hit is different. (In a strict sense, in this embodiment, if the final display mode is a special mode, the expectation for becoming a big hit is 0, but the special mode retention display is the first special mode or the second special mode. It may be said that the display of the pending display in the special mode also has a big hit expectation because it may change to the special mode). Therefore, it is desirable for the player to change the display mode to have a higher expectation of becoming a big hit. Therefore, when any hold display is already displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the display tends to change to a display mode with a high expectation that the hold display will be a big hit. An interest can also be given to the display mode of the hold display when the pre-reading effect (indication effect) is performed, and the interest of the pre-reading effect can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed at a ratio of 1% even when the result of the winning determination is “non-reach out”, but “non-reach” (“short non-reach out”) Alternatively, in the case of “non-reach out”, it may not be determined to perform the pre-reading effect. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 46, a determination value (ratio) is set to determine whether or not to perform pre-reading effect for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result. For example, for each display result A judgment value (percentage) is set to determine whether or not to perform pre-reading effect (for example, “off”, “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It may be

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67106. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executed (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display the new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode (Step S67111).

  Next, in the pre-reading effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance is to be displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode (displayed as "表示" in this example (see Fig. 62)), the special mode ("本" in this example) Are included), the first special aspect (in this example, “」 ”is included in“ △ ”) and the second special aspect (in this example,“ ○ ”is included in“ o ”) There is. However, as described later, the pending display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. May be displayed.

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram of a final display mode determination table. In step S67106, the CPU for effect control 101 determines which display mode is to be finally displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each of the winning determination results (display results of the variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “off” in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 (21) specification to the winning determination result 7 (27) specification) The effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the special mode at a rate of 60%, determines the first special mode at a rate of 30%, and determines the second special mode at a rate of 10%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" by the determination result at the time of winning (determination result at winning 8 (28) specification to determination 12 at winning) 32) In the specification, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 20% and determines the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

  What is characteristic in the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) is that the display result is “off” (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 (21) designation to the winning determination result 7 (27) designation If the display result is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 (28) specification to the winning determination result 12 (32) specification), the second special is the second special The determination value is set so that the proportion determined in the mode is high. By providing such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which the jackpot occurs in the variable display for the advance notice is higher than when it is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, the degree of expectation that the one displayed in the second special mode becomes a big hit can be made higher than the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed Can be focused on In addition, when the final display mode is a special mode, the display result of the variable display is always “off”, so the hold display displayed in the special mode is likely to change to a special mode (a second prefetch effect to be described later) If there is no change due to the pre-reading effect based on the pattern), the display result of the corresponding variable display always becomes “off”. Therefore, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to give an interest in whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47 (A), the display result shown in the winning determination result (finally, “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) is final. Although the judgment value (percentage) for determining the display mode is set, different judgment values (percentage) may be set between the “normal big hit” and the “probable variation big hit”, and the display result is “normal Judgment values (proportions) are set so that the final display mode is determined as a special mode if the ratio is small, even if it is a "big hit" or "somewhat big hit" or "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" May be Further, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table of FIG. 46, a determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode may be set for each variation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning. By doing so, when the pending display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be high. In addition, when the final display mode is determined as the special mode when the final display mode is determined for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning judgment result, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning judgment result is the winning judgment result when the final display mode is determined as the special mode. (22) Only in the case of "non-reach out" may be used. By doing so, the pending display displayed in the special mode is likely to change to the special mode (by the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern described later), but if it does not change, the corresponding variable display reaches Even if it is not a state, it will be off. Therefore, depending on whether or not the display mode of the hold display displayed in the special mode changes, the content and the display result of the variable display can be largely different, and the game fun can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of display modes of the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as final display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected depending on the display result may be different).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern of prefetch effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first pre-reading effect pattern, a second pre-reading effect pattern, and a third pre-reading effect pattern are provided as pre-reading effect patterns. In the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing until the change display of the advance notice object is started Is displayed in a change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and changes from the normal mode to the special mode at any first shift timing. , And the display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at any second shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object after the first shift timing is started. Further, in the third pre-reading effect pattern, the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuation display (pending information) of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and any shift until the fluctuation display of the notice target is started The timing is changed and displayed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  The shift timing of the suspension display is the timing at which a new fluctuation display is started, and the first suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c is erased in the effect symbol variation start process described later, and the remaining suspension is performed. It is a timing (specifically, the timing when step S1800 is executed) of shifting the display one by one and updating the display of the total number of pending storages in the total pending storage display unit 18c. For example, when the first to fifth pending displays of the combined pending storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first pending display is erased at the shift timing (that is, the timing when a new change display is started). And the second pending display is shifted to the first display area, the third pending display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth The displayed hold display is shifted to the third display area, and the fifth displayed hold display is shifted to the fourth display area.

  FIGS. 47 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a pre-reading effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the CPU for effect control 101 selects the pre-reading effect pattern determination table based on the total number of pending storages, and determines the pre-reading effect pattern using the selected pre-reading effect pattern determination table. Specifically, when the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 selects the pre-reading effect pattern determination table (the total number of pending storages = 2) shown in FIG. 47B, and the total number of pending storages. If is larger than 2, the pre-reading effect pattern determination table (the total number of pending storages> 2) shown in FIG. 47 (C) is selected. In this embodiment, the second pre-reading effect pattern changes the display mode in two stages (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode to the special mode), and therefore, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) If there are not at least two or more shift timings, the hold indication is erased before all changes are finished, and execution can not be performed. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 2 (that is, when the pending display corresponding to the latest prize determination result does not have two or more shift timings), the determination value is not determined to be the second pre-reading effect pattern The pre-reading effect pattern determination table (the total number of pending storages = 2) shown in FIG. 47 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected pre-reading effect pattern determination table and sets the first pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a ratio determined for each final display mode determined in step S67106. And the third pre-reading effect pattern is decided.

  For example, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special mode or the second special mode, and the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 is 100% of the prefetching effect pattern. The third pre-read effect pattern is determined. When the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special mode, and the total number of pending storages is larger than 2, the effect control CPU 101 performs the pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 80% of the second pre-reading effect The pattern is determined, and the third look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. When the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the second special mode and the total number of pending storages is larger than 2, the effect control CPU 101 performs the pre-read effect pattern at a rate of 60% for the second pre-read effect The pattern is determined, and the third look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, for example, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the special mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the pending display changes is only the shift timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, before the occurrence of reach during fluctuation, the first rendering symbol stops It may be possible to change at any timing such as before, during reach, at the time of fluctuating stop, etc. before the second and the second production design stop. In this case, it may be determined not only at which shift timing to change, but also at which timing to change. In addition, in the case where the display mode of the hold display can be changed at any timing, the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, the display mode of the hold display changes twice even if the total number of held memories is two). It may be permitted to execute the pre-reading effect based on.

  What is characteristic in the prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and (C) is that the second special mode is more effective than the case where the final display mode is the first special mode. The determination value is set such that the ratio determined for the pre-reading effect pattern becomes high. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the third pre-reading effect pattern (ie when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination, and then displayed as being changed to the special mode) ) When the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (ie, when the hold display changes from the normal mode to the special mode and is further changed from the special mode to the special mode) In comparison, the probability that the jackpot expectation is finally changed and displayed to the second special mode higher than the first special mode is high. Therefore, it is possible to make the expectation of becoming a big hit different for each pre-reading effect pattern, and to make it pay attention to which pre-reading effect pattern is executed. In this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the third pre-reading effect pattern, compared to when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the second special aspect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit The rate at which the final change is made to be displayed is set to be high. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the pre-reading effect is performed in the third pre-reading effect pattern As compared with the case where it is performed, the rate of the final change to be displayed in the second special mode having a high expectation of becoming a big hit may be increased. That is, the second pre-reading effect pattern may be configured to have a higher expectation of becoming a big hit than the third pre-reading effect pattern.

  Moreover, it is characteristic in the prefetch presentation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (C) that the suspension display of the special mode is changed to the special mode than the third prefetch presentation effect pattern in which the suspension display of the normal mode is changed to the special mode. The second pre-reading effect pattern to be done is that the ratio determined as the pre-reading effect pattern is high. By setting in this manner, the percentage of the display of the special mode being changed to the special mode is higher in the special mode of the hold display than in the normal mode of the hold display. Therefore, the hold display of the special mode can be changed to the special mode more easily than the hold display of the normal mode, and the expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the hold display changes from the normal mode to the special mode in the first pre-read effect pattern and the second pre-read effect pattern is displayed. In the third pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display is displayed in the first timing in which the normal mode is changed to the special mode and in the second timing when the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. The timing at which the display is changed from the normal aspect to the first special aspect or the second special aspect is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be timing. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during a variable display (a period over one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) which is executed before the start of the variable display of the advance target. In this case, for example, even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is possible to execute the prefetching effect, and furthermore, regardless of the total number of pending storages, it is possible to determine the second prefetching effect pattern It is displayed in a mode, and is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and displayed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold information) is started. May be displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although three patterns of the first pre-reading effect pattern to the third pre-reading effect pattern are described, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, changing from the normal mode to the first special mode. You may use the pattern which changes to an aspect, and the pattern which changes from a normal aspect to a special aspect and a special aspect to a 1st special aspect, and also changes to a 2nd special aspect. That is, the display mode of the suspension display of a plurality of stages different in the degree of expectation to be a big hit is provided, and in the pre-reading effect in which the display mode of the suspension display changes stepwise and is displayed, an upper limit is set on the number of changes. Absent.

  Once the preread effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target is the shift timing of any hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice object at which the display mode is to be changed. For example, when the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed on the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target.

  48 to 51 are explanatory diagrams showing the change timing determination table. In step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 selects and selects the change timing determination table based on the final display mode determined in step S67106, the prefetching effect pattern determined in step S67107, and the state of the on-hold display changing flag. Based on the change timing determination table and the total number of pending storages, the change timing (the number of shifts) of the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is determined. Specifically, in the effect control CPU 101, the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the special mode, and the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-read effect pattern, and the pending display change flag is set. When the first pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table (when pending display changing flag is not set) shown in FIG. 48 (A) is selected, and when the pending display changing flag is set, FIG. The first pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table (when the on-hold display change flag is set) shown in 2.) is selected. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each of the total hold memory numbers in the selected first look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table. Determine one of 1 to 7.

  Furthermore, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern, and the on-hold display change flag is not set, and the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special When it is an aspect, the second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49A (when the pending display changing flag is not set) (first change timing from the normal aspect to the special aspect and the first special from the special aspect) When the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the second special mode, the second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table (pending display change in progress) shown in FIG. 49 (B) is selected. (When the flag is not set) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the special mode) Selecting a second change timing) to La second special aspect. Further, when the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the on-hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the final display mode determined in step S67106. The second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is set) shown in FIG. 50 (A) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the first special mode or the second special mode) Select the second change timing to the special mode). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs the first change timing (the number of shifts of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each of the total hold storage numbers in the selected second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table. ) Is determined as one of 1 to 6, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined as one of 2 to 7.

  As described above, the ratio of the determination value corresponding to the random number is indicated in the second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 50, and in practice, for example, When using a random number, 1 to 1000 determination values corresponding to the random number are assigned. Therefore, for example, if the ratio of the determination value is 0.5 (first shift timing: 6; first shift timing: 7 in FIG. 49A), determination values 1 to 5 are assigned. Moreover, in this embodiment, the first change timing and the second change timing are simultaneously determined using the second pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 50, but they are determined separately. You may do so.

  Furthermore, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the third pre-read effect pattern, and the pending display change flag is not set, and the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special In the case of the mode, the third pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is not set) (change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (A) is selected, and step S67106 When the final display mode determined in step 2 is the second special mode, the third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is not set) shown in FIG. 51 (B) (from the normal mode to the second special mode) Change timing). Further, when the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the third pre-reading effect pattern and the pending display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the final display mode determined in step S67106. Instead, select the third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is set) (the second change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (C). . Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice object at a rate determined for each of the total hold memory numbers in the selected third pre-reading effect pattern change timing determination table. Determine one of 1 to 7.

  For example, when using the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is not set) shown in FIG. 48 (A), if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%. When the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display changing flag is set) shown in FIG. 48 (B) is used, and the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 generates The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%.

  Also, for example, the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49A (when the pending display flag is not set) (first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and from the special mode to the first special mode) When the second change timing) is used, and the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (the number of shifts) at 1 and the second change timing (shift The number of times is determined as 2; the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1; the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 3 at 50%; and the first change timing (number of shifts) at 20%. 2) and the second change timing (number of shifts) is 3.

  Also, for example, the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49B (when the flag is not set during hold display) (first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and from the special mode to the second special mode) When the second change timing) is used, and the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (the number of shifts) to 1 and the second change timing (shift The number of times is determined as 2; the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1; the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 3 at a rate of 30%; 2) and the second change timing (number of shifts) is 3.

  Also, for example, the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 50A (when the flag is set during suspension display) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the first special mode or the second special mode) When the second change timing to the special mode is used, and the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (the number of shifts) to 1 and 2 at a ratio of 20%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3 at a rate of 50%. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 and the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3.

  In addition, for example, when using the third pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display flag is not set) (the change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode) shown in FIG. If is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change timing (the number of shifts) is 1 at a ratio of 50%, and determines the change timing (the number of shifts) to be 2 at a ratio of 50%. Also, for example, when using the third pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display flag is not set) (the change timing from the normal mode to the second special mode) shown in FIG. If is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change timing (number of shifts) is 1 at a rate of 70%, and determines the change timing (number of shifts) at 2 at a rate of 30%. Also, for example, when using the third pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display flag is set) (change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (C), When the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change timing (number of shifts) is 1 at a ratio of 30%, and determines the change timing (number of shifts) at 2 in a ratio of 70%. Do.

  What is characteristic in the prefetch presentation effect change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 is that the pending display changing flag is set (that is, any pending display is normal mode in the combined pending storage display unit 18c). In the display mode other than the display mode), when the pending display changing flag is not set (that is, any pending display is displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode in the combined hold storage display unit 18c) The determination value is set such that the rate at which the change timing is later (the number of shifts until reaching the change timing increases) is higher than when (when not being). By providing such a feature, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode on the total hold storage display unit 18c, the pre-reading effect to be newly executed has a change timing It is likely to be determined later (the number of shifts until reaching the change timing tends to increase), and the rate of change after the pending display already displayed in display modes other than the normal mode is erased is high. That is, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (for example, a special display) in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the normal mode other than the normal mode is displayed other than the normal mode. The rate at which the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode (for example, special display) further changes can be increased. Therefore, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the read display is likely to change to a display mode having a high expectation of becoming a big hit, and thus prefetching An interest can also be given to the display mode of the hold display when the effect (indication effect) is executed, and the interest of the pre-reading effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 48 to FIG. 51 is that, when the final display mode is the first special mode, the second special has a high expectation of becoming a big hit than the first special mode. That is, the determination value is set such that the rate at which the change timing is later (the number of shifts until the change timing is increased) is higher than in the case of the aspect. By providing such a feature, it is possible to increase the rate at which the display mode of the pending display changes at an early timing (with a small number of shifts) to a second special mode with a high expectation of becoming a big hit. Can. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the timing at which the hold display changes (that is, to what number of the hold display changes), and the game interest can be enhanced. In addition, when the final display mode is the first special mode, the change timing is earlier than the case of the second special mode, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 (the number of shifts until the change timing is reached). The determination value may be set such that the ratio decreases. In this case, when the display mode of the hold display changes at a late timing (a large number of shifts), it can be easily changed to the second special mode with a high expectation of being a big hit. Moreover, in this embodiment, if the pending display changing flag is set, the same pre-reading effect change timing determination table (in this example, the second pre-reading effect pattern change in FIG. 50A) regardless of the final display mode. Although the timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is set) or the third pre-reading effect change timing determination table (when the pending display change flag is set) of FIG. 51C is used, the pending display change flag is set Even in this case, a pre-reading effect change timing determination table to which determination values are assigned so as to be determined to different change timings according to the final display mode may be used.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at an arbitrary timing before the variable display of the advance notice object is started, for example, the timing to be changed (such as the start winning combination, a specific shift timing, or a specific variable display) is specified. A plurality of possible change timing patterns may be provided, and one of them may be selected in accordance with the result of the winning determination.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won, the variable display is performed in the winning order, and the high base (that is, the second start winning opening 14 wins). Even in the easy-to-use state, it is configured such that the pre-reading effect can be executed based on having won one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the process of determining the prefetching effect pattern of the prefetching effect determining process (step S67107) and the process of determining the change timing (step S67108), as shown in FIGS. The prefetching effect pattern and the change timing are determined based on the total number of pending storages added up with the number of pending storages. However, as described above, in the case where the execution of the pre-reading effect based on the start winning of any one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is limited according to the gaming state For example, the variable display based on winning in the second start winning opening 14 is preferentially performed, and in the high base state, the execution of the pre-reading effect based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is limited, and the low base is low. In the state, when the execution of the pre-reading effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 is configured to be restricted, the process of determining the pre-reading effect pattern (step S67107), and the change timing are determined. In the process (step S67108), not the total number of pending storages but the number of pending storages (first pending storage number or second pending storage number) to be subjected to the prefetching effect In Zui and may be determined and the change timing and prefetching performance pattern.

  When the change timing (number of shifts) is determined, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display (step S67110). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change, at the shift timing. In addition, in the suggested effect, the first effect mode (in this example, the character "chance!" Is displayed in the frame of the ellipse) or the second effect mode (in this example, the character of "chance!" In the rectangular frame) Is displayed). In step S67110, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the special mode, the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggested effect is performed in the second effect mode, the rate at which the display mode of the pending display changes is higher than in the case where the suggested effect is performed in the first effect mode. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also performed at shift timings other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish these, suggestive effects performed at the change timing of the pending display are also referred to as suggested effects (success patterns), and suggested effects performed at shift timing other than the change timing of the pending display Also known as a pattern. In this embodiment, any of the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (failure pattern) is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view of a suggestion effect mode determination table. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52 (A). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 80%.

  What is characteristic in the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the rate at which the second effect mode is determined is higher than the first effect mode at the change timing, and the non-change timing is higher than the second effect mode Also, the determination value is set so that the proportion determined in the first effect mode is high. By providing such a feature, it is possible to suggest the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. Therefore, while being able to give variety to suggestion production, it can be made to pay attention to which suggestion production of presentation mode is performed, and it is possible to improve game interest. The present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 52. For example, when the value of one of the shift number counters stored in the prize determination result storage buffer is 0 or more, that is, the display mode of the suspension display changes. The determination value may be set so that the ratio of performing the suggested effect (failure pattern) becomes higher at the non-change timing. By doing this, it is possible to give an expectation depending on the frequency of execution even in the case of the suggested effect (failure pattern).

  In this embodiment, although the possibility that the display mode of the suspension display changes may be suggested at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect, the display mode of the suspension display is according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. It may be suggested that the display mode changes to a different ratio. For example, in the case where the suggested rendering is performed in the first rendering mode A (for example, the characters “chance!” In the frame of the ellipse are displayed in red), the first rendering mode B (for example, the frame of the ellipse) Compared to the case where the character of “chance!” Is displayed in white), the rate of change to the second special mode in which the jackpot expectation is high may be increased.

  In addition, in the suggestion effect, any hold display among the hold displays displayed in the total hold memory number display unit 18c is specified, and it is suggested that the display mode of the specified hold display may change. You may make it produce. In this case, depending on which hold display is specified (specified hold display state), the effect mode is determined using the suggestion effect mode determination table in which different determination values (percentages) are set. You may do so.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a suggestion effect may be performed by the shift timing to which the display mode of a pending | holding display changes, a suggestion effect may not be performed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of presentation modes of a 1st presentation mode and a 2nd presentation mode are provided as a production mode of suggestion production, it is not restricted to this but three or more types of presentation modes are provided. The degree of expectation for changing the display mode may be different (the rate of selection may be different depending on whether or not it is the change timing).

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold memory number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in the normal mode (step S67111). In step S67111, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to display a new hold display in the normal mode, and the data indicating the hold display mode (the normal mode in this example) and the final display determined in step S67106. The data indicating the mode, the data indicating the preread effect pattern determined in step S67107, the shift number counter set in step S67108, and the data indicating the effect mode of the suggested effect determined in step S67110, as a result of the winning determination result It matches and it stores in a prize-time judgment result storage buffer (FIG. 44). By storing these data, it is possible to specify the final display mode determined in the pre-read effect determination process, the pre-read effect pattern, the change timing, and the suggested effect mode in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the prize determination result specification command is received, it is determined whether or not to perform the prefetching effect in the prefetching effect determining process, and the content in the case of executing the prefetching effect is determined. A process of controlling to display in the normal mode is performed. In this embodiment, the change display timing of the hold display in the pre-reading effect is not determined at the start winning game, but if it is permitted to be determined at the start winning game, a new hold display is made in step S67111. Is controlled to be displayed in a display mode (special mode or special mode) other than the normal mode.

  In this embodiment, even when one of the pending displays is displayed in a special mode (or a special mode) or when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed in advance, it is newly performed. The pre-reading effect is permitted to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is limited to repeat the pre-reading effect at a constant rate (for example, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode) May be limited to overlapping execution, or may be limited to overlapping execution of three or more preread effects). Such restriction can make it easy for the player to understand which hold display to pay attention to.

  Also, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but priority is given to any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If it is configured to be executed, (1) it is configured to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the first special symbol, and (2) only the variable display of the second special symbol There are three possible configurations: one is to perform prefetching effects for the target, and (3) the configuration is to perform prefetching effects for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .

  When the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift number counter according to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number Maximum 4 is set to. However, even if the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with the configuration of the above (1), the first start winning opening 14 will receive the first prize. (2) Since the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted and executed (in priority order, not in the winning order), for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the effect symbol described later, even at the shift timing It is desirable not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802 of the fluctuation start process. Moreover, also when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the configuration of the above (3), similarly, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed It is desirable to configure so as not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802 of the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above (2) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift is made according to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) A maximum of 4 is set in the number counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of the above (1), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted when the shift timing comes, regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is subjected to variable display. Moreover, also in the configuration of the above (3), even when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, similarly, any of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Even when the variable display is performed, the value of the shift number counter is subtracted at the shift timing.

  In addition, when it is constituted so that priority is given to change display of the 2nd special symbol, in high base, it is constituted so that pre-reading effect is not performed for change display of the 1st special symbol. May be In addition, when it is constituted in order to execute with fluctuation indication of 2nd special symbol priority, it is constituted so as not to do pre-reading effect based on the winning a prize to 1st starting winning a prize mouth 13 in the big hit game It is also good. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed This can be realized by performing control so as not to execute even if it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect, if it is determined not to execute, or the winning combination determination result specification command received in the effect control microcomputer 560 is determined to be performed. . In addition, when adding the configuration of the above (3) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, during high base or during a big hit game, prefetching based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 Although the effect is not performed, the pre-reading effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 may be performed. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed If it is decided not to execute, or if it is decided to cancel the command at the time of winning result judgment command based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13 received in the microcomputer 560 for effect control, it is not executed It can be realized by controlling as follows. Further, in the gaming control microcomputer 560 side, when in the high base state or in the big hit game, the execution of the prize at-a-time effect processing (that is, the pre-reading effect) based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13 is restricted. In the case of the configuration, in the high base state, only the pre-reading effect based on the start winning on the second start winning opening 14 can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 side, and in the low base state, the first start winning opening Only the pre-read effect based on the start-up winning at 13 can be made executable (that is, even in the low base state, the pre-read effect is given even if a command for determining the winning result based on the start-up winning is received at the second start winning opening 14 It may be decided not to execute).

  In the case where the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, there is a pending storage based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 When a winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs, it is possible not to execute the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in the case of adding the configuration of the above (1) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 In the state where the execution is determined, when a winning on the second start winning opening 14 occurs, the execution of the pre-reading effect which has already been determined may be canceled.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the pre-reading effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol (above (( 1)) Alternatively, a configuration (the above-mentioned (2)) may be added to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but for example, during the high base middle or during a big hit game, to the first start winning opening 13 Pre-reading effects may not be performed based on the winnings of.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S806 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Based on the fact that the effect control command (design confirmation specified command) which instructs stop of all the symbols is received, the fluctuation of the effect design is stopped and the display result (stop design) is derived and displayed Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the fluctuation time ends, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big hit game (step S805).

  During the big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game or during the small hit game. For example, a winning combination operation gate passing command transmitted in step S395 of the first big winning opening opening pre-processing of FIG. 27 or a special winning opening opening specification command sent in step S403 of the big winning opening opening pre-processing of FIG. Or, upon receiving the designated command after the big winning opening opened transmitted in the step S439 of the big winning opening opening processing of FIG. 30, effects such as display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (step S806).

  Although not shown, the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted between step S2462 and step S2463 of the small hit opening pre-processing of FIG. 32, and step S2489 of the small hit opening processing of FIG. Between the step S2490 and the step S2490, a designated command after the opening of the special winning opening is transmitted. Even when these commands are received, effects such as display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 are performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes various data associated with the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, The contents of the winning determination result storage buffer are shifted, the first pending display in the combined pending storage display unit 18c is erased, and the remaining pending displays are shifted one by one, and the totals in the combined pending storage display unit 18c. The pending storage number display is updated (step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed on the fourth is the third display The hold display that has been shifted to the area and shifted to the fifth display is shifted to the fourth display area. In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given to one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the change display of it is executed, production control CPU101 is synchronized to the 1st special symbol fluctuation display When the fluctuation display of the effect design is executed (specifically, when the 1st design fluctuation specified command reception flag is set), it is the 1st that the 1st winning a prize decision result storage buffer remembers The winning determination result is deleted, and the content of the first winning determination result storage buffer is shifted. In addition, when performing fluctuation display of the production symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol fluctuation specification command reception flag is set), at the time of the second winning The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the content of the second winning determination result storage buffer is shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) associated with any of the winning determination results in the winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 44). It is checked whether it is greater than 0 (step S1801). That the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 means that it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. Is shown. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of any shift number counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift number counter is not 0 or not set, and pre-reading effect is executed (display mode of pending display is changed If it is not determined that the control is made, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1803a.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display), for effect control The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the values of all the shift number counters (step S1802). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the shift number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1802, the fact that the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 means that one of the display modes of the hold display displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. It indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the hold display.

  If the value of the shift number counter is not 0 in step S1803, that is, if it is not the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1803 a. On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, the shift number counter whose value has become 0 is set to a state where nothing is set (for example, null). By performing such a process, it is possible to prevent the target that has already reached the change timing (the one in which the value of the shift number counter is reduced to 0) to be the change target in step S1803 again.

  In addition, when it is permitted to change the display mode of the hold display at the start winning combination, for example, the change of the display mode of the hold display at the change timing is realized by performing the following processing. When the pre-reading effect pattern is set as the second pre-reading effect pattern, the first change timing is the start winning prize, and the second change timing is the first shift timing, the effect control CPU 101 performs step S67108 of the pre-reading effect determination process to The value of the 1 shift number counter is set to 0, and the value of the 2nd shift number counter is set to 1. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a new hold display in a special mode based on the value of the first shift number counter being 0 in step S67111 of the prefetch effect determination process, and Set the shift number counter to a state where nothing is set (for example, null). By performing processing in this manner, in the effect symbol variation start processing to be performed thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the second shift number counter in steps S1801 and S1802 and sets it to 0, step S1803. Then, based on the value of the second shift number counter becoming 0, it can be determined that it is the second change timing to change from the special mode to the special mode.

  In step S1803a, CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a special mode or a special mode among the hold displays displayed in total hold storage display unit 18c (step S1803a ). For example, confirmation can be made by referring to the hold display mode of the winning determination result storage buffer (FIG. 44). The data indicating the pending display mode stored in the win determination result storage buffer (FIG. 44) is registered, for example, in the pre-reading effect determination process, and is updated in step S1808 described later. If it is determined in step S1803a that there is no hold display displayed in the special mode or the special mode, the effect control CPU 101 holds that any one hold display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode. If the display change in progress flag is set, it is reset (step S1803b). Thus, depending on whether any hold indication is displayed in a special mode or a special mode, any hold indication may already be other than the normal mode by updating the state of the hold indication changing flag. When displayed in the display mode, the hold display displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode can be changed more easily than the hold display displayed in another normal mode (pre-reading effect determination processing, 46, 48 to 51).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads a fluctuation pattern command from the fluctuation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The stop symbol) is determined (step S1805). That is, by the effect control CPU 101 executing the process of step S1805, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control is a stop symbol. 3 The combination of the production design which is even design (stop design which usually evokes occurrence of big hit) is decided even design. When the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the 3 symbols are odd symbols (probable variation) Determine the combination of the production design that is aligned with the stop design) which reminds of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, in the case of a disconnection (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. In the case where the received display result designation command suddenly indicates a definite big hit or a small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 Determines the combination of the rendering symbols such as "135" as the stopping symbol. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about the production design, the stop design which evokes a big hit is called the big hit design. Also, a stop pattern that evokes a big hit is called a big hit symbol, and a stop pattern that usually brings up a big hit is called a big hit symbol. And, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern) to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined.

  In step S1806, when the flag for holding display change is not set, that is, when no holding display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the totaling hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute the suggested effect (failed pattern) or to execute it in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at the ratio of the non-change timing suggested action mode determination table (when the pending display change flag is not set) shown in). Do. When the pending display changing flag is set, that is, when any pending display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the totaling hold display unit 18c, the non-change timing indicated suggestion effect shown in FIG. 52 (C) It is determined not to execute the suggestion effect (failure pattern) or to execute in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at a rate of the mode determination table (when the flag is set during suspension display change). In addition, although the determination value corresponding to the determination item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the non-change timing suggested action mode determination table determination table, In the examples shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (C), in order to simplify the description, the proportions of assigned judgment values are shown. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (failure pattern), and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“no effect”, “No (1) It is decided on the "presentation mode" or the "second presentation mode").

  For example, when the pending display changing flag is not set, that is, when no pending display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the total pending display unit 18c, the suggested effect (failure pattern) is 80%. It is decided not to execute, it is decided to carry out the suggested effect in the first effect mode at a rate of 15%, and it is decided to carry out the suggested effect in the second effect mode at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the pending display changing flag is set, that is, when any pending display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the combined hold display unit 18c, the suggested effect (failure pattern) at a rate of 0%. Is determined not to be performed, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 20%.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (C), in this embodiment, when the pending display changing flag is set, that is, any pending display in the combined pending display portion 18c is a special aspect or a special aspect When it is displayed in, the suggested rendering is performed at a higher rate than in the other cases. Therefore, the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode can be enhanced, and the game interest can be enhanced. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect may not be performed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestion effect be performed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  Further, when the pending display changing flag is set, that is, when any pending display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the total pending display unit 18c, the final display mode of the pending display is Depending on whether it is 1 special mode or the 2nd special mode, you may make it decide the production mode of suggestion production in the 1st production mode A or the 1st production mode B by a different rate. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the first effect mode A rather than the first effect mode B. Rate may be increased.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the fluctuation pattern of the determined effect (failure pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating the mode of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern, and data indicating the mode of the prefetching effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, The data etc. which show the aspect of are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. In addition, data corresponding to parts for effects not to be controlled even though corresponding to the effect control process timer determination value (for example, pre-reading effects described in display control execution data of process table used when pre-reading effects are not executed The dummy data (data which does not designate control) may be set to the data which shows the mode of.

  The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speakers 27R and 27L as presentation parts is executed (step S1827). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to cause the speakers 27R and 27L to output sound, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S1814), and processes the value of the effect control process flag during the production symbol fluctuation (step S802) To a value corresponding to (step S1815).

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the value of any of the shift number counters is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display If the middle flag is set, it is set (step S1808). Further, in step S1808, CPU for effect control 101 sets a shift number counter with a value of 0 in a state where no value is set (for example, Null) in the prize determination result storage buffer, and the corresponding hold display Update the data to indicate the aspect. For example, when the value of the first shift number counter becomes 0, if the value of the second shift number counter is 0 (that is, if it is not the second pre-reading effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is a normal mode Update the display mode shown in the final display mode, and if the value of the second shift number counter is not 0 (that is, if it is the second look-ahead effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode Update. In addition, when the value of the second shift number counter becomes 0 (that is, in the case of the second change timing of the second pre-reading effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is indicated from the special mode to the final display mode Update to display mode. By performing such processing, in the pre-reading effect determination process, it is possible to determine the presence or absence and content of the pre-reading effect based on the display mode of the currently displayed pending display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the effect pattern (in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The stop symbol) is determined (step S1810).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table for display mode change according to the prefetched effect pattern, the final display mode and the suggested effect mode, and the fluctuation pattern (step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  With the process table for display mode change, along with the fluctuation display of the production design, at the start of the fluctuation of the production design, execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) and execute the pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of process tables for changing display modes are provided in accordance with the modes of the suggested effect (success pattern) to be executed and the pre-read effect. Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect mode (the first effect mode or the second effect mode in this example) of the suggested effect (success pattern) determined in the prefetch effect determination process and stored in the winning determination result storage buffer Based on the pre-reading effect pattern (in the present example, any of the first pre-reading effect pattern to the third pre-reading effect pattern) and the final display mode (in the present example, the first display mode or the second display mode) It is possible to specify in what manner the suggested effect (success pattern) is executed, and which pending display is changed to what display condition to perform the pre-reading effect. Therefore, the CPU for effect control 101 selects one of the process tables for changing the display mode depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern), the prefetching effect pattern and the final display mode, and the change pattern. Is selected, and control of the rendering device is executed according to the contents of process data 1 of the process table for the selected display mode change to execute the suggested rendering (success pattern) in the rendering mode determined in the prefetch rendering determination process. In addition, it is possible to execute pre-reading effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice object to the determined display mode.

  FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S1841) and subtracts one from the value of the variation time timer (step S1842). When the process timer times out (step S1843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S1844). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S1845).

  Next, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S1849), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S1851). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination specification command has been received is set (step S1850), the process proceeds to step S1851. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the control shifts to control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received, so for example, the fluctuation pattern command showing a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards was received Even in such a case, it is possible to end the fluctuation of the effect pattern when the normal fluctuation time has elapsed (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  In this embodiment, although the determination process including whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect is performed in the pre-reading effect determination process based on the reception of the winning determination result specification command, those processes are performed. It may be made to execute in processing during design change. For example, it is possible to execute the determination process including whether or not the pre-reading effect is to be performed by including the process of monitoring the winning determination result storage buffer in the effect symbol variation processing.

  FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the effect design fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the confirmation command reception flag is reset. Then, control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S853). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether the jackpot or the jackpot has been determined is confirmed, for example, by the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it is also possible to confirm whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the stop symbol being determined.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the effect symbol on condition that the symbol determination designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, when the fluctuation time timer based on the received fluctuation pattern command times out, control may be performed so as to end the fluctuation of the rendering symbol even without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol determination designating command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the CPU for effect control 101 receives any of the big hit start designated command reception flags (a big hit start 1 designated command reception flag indicating that the big hit start 1 designated command has been received, and a big hit start 2 designated command Check whether the big hit start 2 specified command reception flag shown or the small hit / sudden positive change big hit start specified command received flag showing small hit / sudden definite change big hit start specified command is set (step S871) . If one of the big hit start designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen according to the set flags on the effect display device 9 (step S872).

  In the present embodiment, a game start screen is displayed according to the type of hit, that is, whether it is usually a big hit, a definite big hit, a sudden big hit, or a small hit.

  In addition, the set flag (big hit start 1 designated command reception flag, big hit start 2 designated command received flag, or small hit / sudden probability variable big hit start designated command received flag) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big hit game (step S805) (step S874).

  In addition, the process process for the small hit display is provided separately from the process process for the big hit display, and in the case of the small hit, for example, for a predetermined period (the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be used to produce the same effect as in the sudden big hit.

  In addition, when it is a small hit or sudden definite strange big hit, instead of executing the production based on reception of a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command, the CPU 101 for production control, for example, for small hit / sudden definite strange big hit On the basis of the reception of the fluctuation pattern command of, the effect may be executed for a predetermined period to suggest that it is a small hit or a sudden positive change big hit. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches, for each process time, process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  In step S 872, the CPU for effect control 101 performs control to display a screen notifying the start of the big hit game on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect processing, the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not the big hit end effect timer is set (step S 880). When the big hit end production timer is set, it moves to step S885. If the big hit end production timer is not set, the big hit end specified command reception flag (big hit end 1 specified command reception flag, big hit end 2 specified command received flag, small hit / sudden hit) which indicates that the big hit end specified command has been received Whether or not the definite variation big hit end designated command reception flag) is set is confirmed (step S881). If the big hit end specified command reception flag is set, the big hit end specified command received flag (big hit end 1 specified command received flag, big hit end 2 specified command received flag, or small hit / sudden definite variation big hit end specified command received flag ) Is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the big hit end display time is set in the big hit end effect timer (step S883), and the big hit end screen (screen notifying the end of the big hit game) on the effect display device 9 Is controlled (step S884). Specifically, the VDP 109 is instructed to display the big hit end screen.

  Further, as described in step S163 of FIG. 31 and step S2163 of FIG. 34, the big hit end display time and the small hit end display time of the high probability big hit in the low base case are set to 12.3 seconds. On the other hand, the big hit end indication time and the small hit end indication time of the sudden big hit in the case of high base are set to 1.1 seconds. In the present embodiment, the common big hit end screen is displayed with the big hit end display time and the small hit end display time of the sudden big hit in the low base state. As a common big hit end screen, a display indicating that the mode has been shifted to the common mode is displayed. After that, the rendering of the common mode starts. The effect in the common mode is an effect in which it is unclear or incomprehensible whether or not it is shifted to the positive change state.

  In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small hit has ended or the sudden big hit has ended, by the relatively long (here, 12.3 seconds) common big hit end screen, not the small hit. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the sudden big hit has ended and the state may be shifted to a definite change state.

  On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base state is maintained in both the case where the sudden big hit occurs and the case where the small hit occurs, so that the player feels expectation at the end of the big hit and the small hit. Such a relatively long presentation is not performed, but a common short hit end screen of a relatively short (here, 1.1 seconds) is displayed.

  In step S885, the value of the big hit end effect timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If it has not, the process is ended. If the jackpot end effect time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch effect restriction flag if it is set (step S887).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  Next, a specific example of pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), when three suspension displays are displayed in the total suspension storage display unit 18c in the normal mode ("O" in this example) in the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. When the derivation display is performed, a new variable display is started. Next, if the timing at which the shift of the hold display is performed is a change timing, the suggested rendering of the second rendering mode (in this example, the character "chance!" Is displayed in a rectangular frame) which has been determined in advance. Is executed (FIG. 62 (B)). Then, when the pre-read effect pattern determined in advance is the third pre-read effect pattern and the final display mode is the first special mode, the second hold display is the first special mode (in the present example, “○” When the final display mode is the second special mode, the second hold display is the second special mode (in this example) (FIG. 62 (C1)). “○” is included in “○”) and displayed (FIG. 62 (C2)).

  In addition, when the pre-read effect pattern determined in advance is the first pre-read effect pattern or the second pre-read effect pattern, the second hold display has a special mode (in this example, “x” in “o”). Changed to be displayed (FIG. 62 (C3)). Next, when the derived display of the off symbol is performed (FIG. 62 (D)), a new variable display is started. Then, if the timing at which the shift of the reserved display is performed is the change timing, and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) determined in advance is the second effect mode, the second effect mode (rectangular in this example) The character of “chance!” Is displayed in the frame) (see FIG. 62 (E1)). Then, when the pre-read effect pattern determined in advance is the second pre-read effect pattern and the final display mode is the first special mode, the first hold display is the first special mode (in the example, “○” When the final display mode is the second special mode, the first hold display is the second special mode (in this example) (FIG. 62 (F1)). “O” is included in “O”) and displayed (FIG. 62 (F 2)). In addition, if the timing at which a new variable display is started and the shift of the suspension display is performed is the non-change timing, and the effect mode of the determined indication effect (failure pattern) is the first effect aspect, the first effect Although the suggestion effect of the aspect (in this example, the character “chance!” Is displayed in the frame of the ellipse) is executed (FIG. 62 (E2)), the display mode of the hold display does not change (FIG. 62 (F3) )).

  FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the output of two jackpots. FIG. 63 (A) is a timing chart in the case of the normal big hit and the positive variation big hit. FIG. 63 (B) is a timing chart in the case of a small hit during low base (during short time). FIG. 63C is a timing chart in the case of a small hit during high base (during short time).

  Referring to FIG. 63 (A), when it usually becomes a big hit or a probability variation big hit, after the variation display of the production design is derived and displayed (refer to the timing chart of the variation display), the symbol determination time (0 .. When 5 seconds has elapsed, it is determined in step S132 of FIG. 26 that the symbol determination time has timed out. If it is a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit, it is determined that the big hit flag is set in step S133 of FIG. 26, and the process to be performed shifts to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing of FIG. Accordingly, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is not less than 5 in step S1061 and step S1062 in FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal is started in step S1063 and step S1102 and step S1103 in FIG. See the timing chart).

  Thereafter, it is detected in step S391 of FIG. 27 that the gaming ball has passed through the winning combination actuation gate 33 (refer to the timing chart of the winning combination actuation gate 33), and opening of the special variable winning prize ball device starts in step S396. (See the timing chart of the Special Variable Winning Ball Device). Then, after the special variable winning prize ball device is released after a predetermined number of rounds (15 rounds in the present embodiment), it is judged that the big hit round is finished in step S 438 of FIG. If it is determined in step S165 of FIG. 31 that the time for the big hit end display has elapsed (see the timing chart for the big hit 2 signal), the processing to be performed shifts to the special symbol normal processing in step S173. Accordingly, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in step S1061 and step S1062 in FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal in steps S1102 and S1103 is stopped (see the timing chart of the big hit 2 signal).

  Referring to FIG. 63 (B), when a small hit occurs in the low base state, after the variation display of the production symbol is derived and displayed (see the timing chart of the variation display), the symbol determination time (0 in this embodiment) When .5 seconds elapses, it is determined that the symbol determination time has timed out in step S132 of FIG. If it is a small hit, it is determined that the big hit flag is not set in step S133 in FIG. 26, and it is determined that the small hit flag is set in step S147, and the process to be executed is the small hit in FIG. Move to open pre-processing. Accordingly, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is not less than 5 in step S1061 and step S1062 in FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal is started in step S1063 and step S1102 and step S1103 in FIG. See the timing chart).

  After that, each pattern time has passed, the process shifts to small hit opening pre-processing and output of the big hit 2 signal is started, and opening of the special variable winning prize ball device is started at step S2467 in FIG. 32 (special variable Refer to the timing chart of the winning ball device). Then, after the special variable winning prize ball device has been opened for a predetermined number of rounds (two rounds in the present embodiment), it is determined that the small hitting round is finished in step S2489 of FIG. If it is determined in step S2165 in FIG. 34 that the small hit end display time has elapsed (see the timing chart for the big hit 2 signal), the processing to be performed is shifted to the special symbol normal processing in step S2166. . Accordingly, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in step S1061 and step S1062 in FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal in steps S1102 and S1103 is stopped (see the timing chart of the big hit 2 signal).

  Referring to FIG. 63 (C), also in the case of small hit in the high base state, two big hit signals are output as in the case of small hit in the low base state shown in FIG. 63 (B). However, while the small hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds in the low base state, the small hit end display time is 1.1 in the high base state in order to accelerate the storage of pending storage. It is set to seconds. For this reason, in the low base state, since the special variable winning prize ball device is closed, the jackpot 2 signal is continuously output for a period longer than the high base state. Further, as described in step S1050 to step S1055 of FIG. 38, the big hit 1 signal is not output in the small hit state. Thus, it can be appropriately recognized outside whether the small hit state occurs in the high base state or the low base state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the low base state, it is difficult for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small hit has ended or the sudden big hit has ended, and the big hit instead of the small hit is finished. In order to be able to give the player a sense of hope that they may have shifted to the common jackpot end screen for a relatively long period (here, 12.3 seconds) did.

  Also, as described above, in the high base state, the high base state is maintained in both the case where the sudden big hit occurs and the case where the small hit occurs, so the player at the end of the big hit and the small hit The common big hit end screen is displayed for a shorter period (in this case, 1.1 seconds) than in the low base state, in order to avoid having a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the output period of the big hit 2 signal, in the case of a small hit, is the period from the transition to the small hit opening process to the end of the small hit end process and the transition to the special symbol normal processing, It is a period from the transition to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing to the end of the big hit end processing, and the transition to the special symbol normal processing. For this reason, the output period of the big hit 2 signal, in the high base state and the low base state, the small hit end display time and the big hit end display time (1.1 seconds in high base, 12.3 in low base) Longer than seconds).

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit. Referring to FIG. 64, FIG. 64 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of sudden big hit, and FIG. 64 (B) shows the case of small hit.

  Referring to FIG. 64 (A), at the time of the sudden big hit, a symbol determination designating command is transmitted at step S125 of FIG. When the stop symbol of is derived and displayed, it is informed that a sudden big hit has occurred.

  As the big hit display designation command is transmitted in step S135 of FIG. 26 and the big hit display time is started in step S137, the big hit display period of the big hit is started, and the player is prepared to aim for the team operating gate 33. The display of a small right-handed indication to make it start is started. In this period, it is not determined whether the gaming ball has passed to the winning combination actuation gate 33 or not. That is, it is an ineffective period of the combination operation gate 33. In addition, the right-handed display here is a display to the effect of aiming at the combination operation gate 33.

  When the jackpot display period has elapsed, it is started to determine whether or not the gaming ball has passed to the combination operating gate 33 in step S391 of FIG. When this starts, a large right-handed indication to aim at the combination operation gate 33 is started. If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the gate-linking operation gate 33, opening of the special winning opening is started in step S396 of FIG. In addition, it may be made to inform that opening of a big winning a prize opening is started from a passage to combination operation gate 33 until a big winning a prize mouth is opened.

  When predetermined opening and closing of the special winning opening is executed in FIGS. 28 and 29, and it is determined in step S438 of FIG. 30 that opening of the special winning opening is completed, small in step S162 of FIG. A hit / suspicious big hit end designation command is sent, and a big hit end display period is started. When the big hit end display time has elapsed, the processing regarding the sudden big hit ends.

  Referring to FIG. 64 (B), at the time of small hit, a symbol determination designation command is transmitted at step S125 of FIG. 25, and based on the command, a production symbol indicating that it is a small hit at step S853 of FIG. When the stop symbol of is derived and displayed, it is informed that a small hit has occurred. In addition, it is good also considering the stop pattern of the production | presentation design which shows that it is a small hit as the production | presentation design which shows that it is a sudden definite big hit.

  The small hit start designation command is transmitted in step S148 of FIG. 26, and the small hit display period is started in step S149, whereby the small hit display period is started. It may be notified that the opening of the big winning opening is started between the small hit display period and the opening of the big winning opening. When the small hit display period has elapsed, the opening of the special winning opening is started in step S2467 of FIG.

  Then, opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed a predetermined number of times in FIGS. 32 and 33, and if it is determined in step S2489 of FIG. The hit / suspicious big hit end designation command is transmitted, and the small hit end display period is started. When the small hit end display period has elapsed, the small hit processing ends.

First Modification of First Embodiment
In the first modification, even in the small hit, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33, and when it passes, whether the small hit occurs or the sudden big hit occurs Let us know. Specifically, it is as follows.

  FIG. 65 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of the sudden big hit and the small hit in the first modified example. Referring to FIG. 65, FIG. 65 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of sudden big hit, and FIG. 65 (B) shows the case of small hit.

  Referring to FIG. 65 (A), at the time of sudden big hit, a symbol confirmation designated command is transmitted, and based on the command, the stop symbol of the common production symbol is displayed and derived for the big hit and small hit. , It is informed that a sudden big hit or a small hit has occurred.

  As the big hit display start command is sent and the big hit display time is started, a common effect display period is started for the big hit and the small hit, and the player is made to prepare for aiming at the commercial operation gate 33. The display of the smaller right-handed display starts. In this period, it is not determined whether the gaming ball has passed to the winning combination actuation gate 33 or not. That is, it is an ineffective period of the combination operation gate 33.

  When the common effect display period has elapsed, it is started to determine whether the game ball has passed to the winning combination actuation gate 33 or not. When this starts, a large right-handed indication to aim at the combination operation gate 33 is started. When it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the team-operated operation gate 33, it is notified that a sudden jackpot has occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate-operating gate 33, when the time T1 has elapsed, the opening of the special winning opening is started.

  When it is determined that opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed a predetermined number of times and opening of the special winning opening is finished, a small hit / rapid confirmation big hit end designation command is transmitted, and the big hit end display period of the sudden big hit Is started. When the big hit end display time has elapsed, the processing regarding the sudden big hit ends.

  Referring to FIG. 65 (B), at the time of small hit, a symbol determination designation command is transmitted, and based on the command, the stop of the common production symbol between the big hit and the small hit shown in FIG. 65 (A) The symbol is derived and displayed (a common outcome effect is executed) to notify that a sudden big hit or small hit has occurred.

  The small hit start designation command is transmitted, and the small hit display time is started, whereby a common effect display period is started for the sudden big hit and the small hit, and in order to make the player prepare for aiming at the commercial operation gate 33. The display of the small right-handed indication of is started. In this period, it is not determined whether the gaming ball has passed to the winning combination actuation gate 33 or not. That is, it is an ineffective period of the combination operation gate 33.

  When the common effect display period has elapsed, it is started to determine whether the game ball has passed to the winning combination actuation gate 33 or not. When this starts, a large right-handed indication to aim at the combination operation gate 33 is started. If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the team operation gate 33, it is informed that a small hit has occurred. On the other hand, when time T2 elapses after the common effect display period has elapsed, the opening of the special winning opening is started.

  When it is determined that opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed a predetermined number of times and opening of the special winning opening is finished, the small hit / rapid confirmation big hit end designation command is transmitted, and the small hitting end display period starts Be done. When the small hit end display period has elapsed, the small hit processing ends.

  Thereby, in the first modified example, even in the case of a small hit, it is notified that aiming at the combination operating gate 33, and when the game ball passes through the combination operating gate 33 before the predetermined time elapses It can be informed whether a big hit has occurred or a small hit has occurred.

  Even in such a case, the special symbol process flag is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment, so that two big hit signals are output as described in the first embodiment (particularly in FIG. 38). Ru.

Second Modification of First Embodiment
In the second modification, even in the small hit, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33, and even if it passes, the occurrence of the small hit or the big hit occurs Do not report if you Specifically, it is as follows.

  FIG. 66 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit in the second modified example. Referring to FIG. 66, FIG. 66 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of a sudden big hit, and FIG. 66 (B) shows a case of a small hit.

  66 (A) of the second modification is different from FIG. 65 (A) of the first modification in that even if a gaming ball passes through the winning combination actuation gate 33, it does not notify that a sudden hit has occurred. And what is displayed in the end display period of the sudden big hit is not the final indication of the big hit, but is a point where a common finish indication is made for the big hit and the small hit.

  66B of the second modification is different from FIG. 65B of the first modification in that it does not notify that a small hit has occurred even if the gaming ball passes through the combination operation gate 33 The display in the small hit end display period is not a small hit end display but a point at which a common close display is performed for the above-mentioned sudden big hit and small hit.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process according to the second modification. Referring to FIG. 67, the big hit end process of the second modification is different from the big hit end process of FIG. 31 of the first embodiment in the case where the big hit type is determined as the positive variation big hit or the big hit big hit in step S166. If it is determined in step S174 that the time saving state is not in effect, it is determined that the time saving state is in effect by setting the probability change flag in step S175 and leaving the time saving flag as it is In this case, as in step S170 and step S171 in FIG. 31, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set.

  As described above, in the second modification, even in the case of a small hit, it is informed that the aim operation gate 33 is aimed, and even if the game ball passes through the operation gate 33 before the predetermined time elapses, Even at the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit, it is not notified whether the sudden big hit has occurred or the small hit has occurred.

  Also, even after the sudden big hit is finished, if the sudden big hit occurs while not in the short time state, control is not performed to the short time state, and if the sudden big hit occurs while in the short time state, control to the short time state. That is, when the sudden big hit ends, it is controlled to the same time saving state as the short time state when the big hit occurs. When the small hit ends, it is controlled to be the same as the short time state when the small hit occurs. For this reason, even after the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit, it is not notified whether the sudden big hit has occurred or the small hit has occurred.

  Even in such a case, the special symbol process flag is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment, so that two big hit signals are output as described in the first embodiment (particularly in FIG. 38). Ru.

Third Modification of First Embodiment
In the third modified example, one that does not include the combination operating gate 33 shown in FIG. 1 and the combination operating switch 33a shown in FIG. 3 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a modification of the first big winning opening opening pre-processing. Referring to FIG. 68, compared to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing described with reference to FIG. 27, in the modification, the processing relating to the combination operating gate 33 and the combination operating switch 33a is eliminated. Specifically, in FIG. 68, step S381, step S384, step S391, step S392, and step S395 in FIG. 27 are eliminated. As a result, not only for small hits but also for regular big hits, positive odds, and sudden big hits, a round of big hit is started without passing the gaming ball to the run-in operation gate 33.

Fourth Modification of First Embodiment
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing a modification of the effect design fluctuation start process. FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing a modification of the suggestion effect mode determination table. In the modified example shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (failure pattern) at the non-change timing is determined in step S1806 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the determined effect. It is confirmed whether or not the mode is the second effect mode having a high degree of expectation, and the on-hold change flag is set (step S1806a). Then, in the second effect mode, when the pending change flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a suggested effect restriction flag for restricting the execution of the suggested effect (step S1806b).

  Further, in step S1806 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 does not show the non-displayed display in progress flag shown in FIG. 70 (C1) according to the state of the suggested effect restriction flag when the flag is set. Change timing at suggestive effect mode determination table (when pending display changing flag is set) (when suggested effect restriction flag not set) or at non-change timing suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70 (C2) (with pending display change flag At the set time) (at the time of the suggestion effect restriction flag set), the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern) is determined. As shown in FIGS. 70 (C1) and (C2), when the suggestion effect restriction flag is set, it is restricted that the suggestion effect of the first effect aspect having a lower degree of expectation than the second effect aspect is executed. ing. In this way, when the pending display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode, after the suggestion effect (failure pattern) of the second effect mode having a high degree of expectation is performed, the degree of expectation is poor. (1) It is possible to limit the execution of the suggested effect (failure pattern) of the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the loss of feeling of expectation. In addition, since the suggestion effect limitation flag set is simultaneously reset at the timing of resetting the pending display changing flag (step S1803c), the pending display of the special mode or the special mode being displayed is deleted, and the pending display is newly added. When it is displayed in the aspect or the special aspect, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect (failure pattern) of the first effect aspect. In the example shown in FIG. 70, at the change timing, the suggestion effect mode determination table in which the determination values are set at the same ratio is used regardless of the state of the suggestion effect restriction flag, but it is not limited to this. Also, according to the state of the suggestion effect restriction flag, the suggestion effect mode determination table in which the determination value is set at a different ratio (for example, the indication effect mode decision table used when the suggestion effect restriction flag is set is The determination value may be set such that one rendering mode is not determined, and no rendering or a second rendering mode is determined.

Summary of First Embodiment
(1) As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to execute the display processing and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning and the like. It has a specific judging means to judge. In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control is realized by executing pre-reading effect determination processing, effect design fluctuation start processing and the like, and based on the determination result by the specific determination means, the on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold storage The change display based on the hold storage becomes a big hit by changing and displaying the hold display in the display unit 18c in a display mode other than the normal mode (in this example, the special mode, the first special mode or the second special mode). Preview production effect executing means for executing a pre-reading effect for previewing that there is a possibility, suggestion production execution means for performing suggestion production that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes (that there is a possibility of change) Is equipped. Then, the advance notice effect executing means is configured to change the ratio of the pending display being displayed according to whether or not there is the pending display being displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the displayed pending displays. One of them is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode and displayed. For example, when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode of the hold display is likely to change as compared to other hold displays. This is new depending on whether or not the pending change flag indicating that any of the pending displays displayed on the combined pending storage display unit 18c is displayed in the special mode or the special mode is set. Determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect at different ratios (reducing the ratio to be newly executed when set), determining at different ratios the change timing of pre-reading effect to be newly executed (set) When the time change indicator is delayed (increase the rate of change after the pending display displayed in the special mode or the special mode is erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the display mode of the hold display when the pre-reading effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-reading effect.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning combination, the pending change flag is set (that is, any pending display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode). When there is a pending display that is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, by changing the ratio of executing the new pre-reading effect or when delaying the change timing of the pre-reading effect to be newly executed. In addition, although it is realized that the display mode is easy to change as compared with other hold displays, the realization method is not limited to this. For example, in the pre-read effect determination process executed at the start winning combination, the final display mode (for example, the upper limit of change is changed when performing the pre-read effect or not) with respect to the latest winning determination result. It does not have to be) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started, the display mode of any hold display is changed (and changed to any display mode) Is determined, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process). Then, in this configuration, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not there is a hold display of the special mode in the effect symbol variation start process, and if there is a hold display of the special mode, the high ratio is the normal mode The pending display of the special mode is determined as the target for changing the display mode, rather than the pending display. In this way, when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode can be changed more easily than the other hold display. . Further, for example, in the effect design change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform pre-reading effect based on the determination result at each winning and the display mode after change. Then, in this configuration, in the effect design variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold display of the special mode, and if there is a hold display of the special mode, the special mode is higher than the hold display of the normal mode at a high rate. If there is a hold display being displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode by determining the hold display of the target as a target to change the display mode, the display mode is the display mode compared to other hold displays. It can be made to change easily.

  (2) Further, in this embodiment, the advance notice effect executing means is a plurality of types of special modes (for example, the first special mode or the second special mode) which are display modes different from the normal mode. Aspect: In addition, it is possible that the display result of the variable display based on the pending storage becomes the specific display result by changing and displaying any of special modes (details will be described later)). It is possible to execute an advance notice effect that gives notice that there is a different degree of expectation (for example, when displayed in the second special mode, compared to when displayed in the first special mode) Because the percentage of big wins is high, expectations are high). Also, the advance notice effect executing means is different from the normal mode when the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed (when the preread effect is executed based on the third look-ahead effect pattern) When changing the hold display displayed in a display mode (for example, a special mode, and may include the first special mode (details will be described later)) into a special mode (a second pre-reading effect) Depending on the pattern, when performing pre-reading effect), it is changed and displayed in one of a plurality of types of special modes at different rates (when pre-reading effect is executed based on the third pre-reading effect pattern is The ratio of changing to the second special mode with a high degree of expectation is high, as compared to when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the second pre-reading effect pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to give notice of the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (big hit) with different expectations, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-reading effect.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning, the final display mode (for example, change of whether or not it is possible to execute pre-reading effect on the latest winning determination result) As the upper limit, it does not have to be changed) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started, whether the display mode of any hold display is changed (and which Also in the case where it is determined that the display mode is changed, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process) By determining the final display mode and the pre-reading effect pattern based on the determination result at the time of winning, it is possible to execute the notice effect with different degree of expectation Both can be displayed first is changed to the special mode or the second special aspect in different proportions in the case of changing from a special manner when changing from normal mode. Further, for example, in the effect design change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results Even in the case of determining (for example, whether to perform preread effect based on each winning determination result and determining the display mode after change), the display mode after changing based on the winning determination result By determining, it is possible to perform the advance presentation with different degrees of expectation. In addition, by determining the display mode after the change based on the determination result at the time of winning and the display mode of the suspension display, the first special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode at different rates when changing from the normal mode and changing from the special mode It can be changed and displayed in 2 special modes.

  Note that among the display modes of the plurality of types of suspension displays used in this embodiment, the special mode may be changed to the special mode, so it has been described as being a category different from the special mode. It may be positioned as the special mode with the lowest jackpot expectation, and may be in the same category as the special mode. That is, in this embodiment, the special mode and the special mode are described separately, and the pre-reading effect pattern displayed by being changed from the special mode to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) is second previewed In the pre-reading effect, it is only necessary to change the display mode from the display mode with low jackpot expectation to the display mode with high jackpot expectation, and changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. Alternatively, the first special mode may be changed to the second special mode having a higher jackpot expectation.

  (3) Further, in this embodiment, even if the pending display changes to the special mode, it may not change from the special mode to the special mode after that (by the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern), for example, When changing to the special mode, it may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. By doing this, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation when the display mode is changed to the special mode.

  (4) Further, in this embodiment, the preview presentation effect execution means changes the display mode of any hold display among the hold displays displayed, and the display result of the variable display is a specific display result according to whether the display mode is displayed. It is possible to carry out pre-reading effects to give notice with different degrees of expectation that there is a possibility of (big hit). This means that, for example, when the change timing is early, the rate of change to the second special mode with high jackpot expectation is high, and when the change timing is late, the rate of change to the first special mode with low jackpot expectation Is realized by determining the change timing to be high. Further, in this embodiment, the change of the display mode of the hold display is performed only up to two times at the maximum, but by increasing the types of display modes, it is also possible to increase the number of times of stepwise change. . In this case, when the change timing is early, since the opportunity (for example, the number of times of shift timing) to change to the display mode having a higher degree of expectation thereafter increases, the degree of expectation can be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to give notice of the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result with different degrees of expectation, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-reading effect.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning, the final display mode (for example, change of whether or not it is possible to execute pre-reading effect on the latest winning determination result) As the upper limit, it does not have to be changed) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started, whether the display mode of any hold display is changed (and which Also in the case where it is determined that the display mode is changed, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process) For example, with regard to the pending display corresponding to the winning determination that is shown to be a big hit, it is changed at an early stage (at a stage where the number of shifts is small) By increasing the coupling, it is capable of executing prefetch effect that notified by a different degree of expectation or display mode of one of the hold display is changed. Similarly, in the effect pattern change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results If it is determined to be determined (for example, whether to perform preread effect based on each winning determination result and determining the display mode after change), the winning determination result shown to be a big hit With regard to the pending display corresponding to the above, by increasing the rate of changing in the early stage (the stage where the number of shifts is small), it is possible to carry out pre-reading effects to give notice with different expectations depending on which display mode of the pending display changes. It is.

  (5) Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode and a plurality of display modes (special mode, first special mode and second special mode) different from the normal mode, When there is a pending display being displayed in a display mode (special mode or first special mode) different from the normal mode among the displayed pending displays, the advance presentation effect executing means performs the normal mode and the normal mode at a high ratio. The display mode is changed to a display mode (a first special mode or a second special mode) higher than the current stage, and displayed as the hold display displayed in different display modes. This is new depending on whether or not the pending change flag indicating that any of the pending displays displayed on the combined pending storage display unit 18c is displayed in the special mode or the special mode is set. Determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect at different ratios (reducing the ratio to be newly executed when set), determining at different ratios the change timing of pre-reading effect to be newly executed (set) In addition to delaying the change timing (increasing the rate of change after the pending display displayed in the special mode or the special mode is increased), the display is changed from the special mode to the special mode. (2) The rate at which the pre-read effect pattern is determined at a higher rate than the third pre-read effect pattern displayed by changing from the normal mode to the special mode It is realized Te. With such a configuration, when there is a pending display being displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to a display mode at a higher stage than the current stage is high, It can enhance the interest of pre-reading effects.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning, the final display mode (for example, change of whether or not it is possible to execute pre-reading effect on the latest winning determination result) As the upper limit, it does not have to be changed) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started, whether the display mode of any hold display is changed (and which Also in the case where it is determined that the display mode is changed, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process) , In the effect design variation start process, check whether there is a hold display of the special mode, if there is a hold display of the special mode, the hold display of the normal mode at a high rate Also, the pending display of the special aspect is determined as the target for changing the display mode, and in the pre-reading effect determination processing, the ratio in which the second pre-reading effect pattern is determined is higher than the third pre-reading effect pattern In the case where there is a pending display being displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to a higher-stage display mode can be increased. Further, for example, in the effect design change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results Even in the case of (for example, it is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect based on each winning combination determination result and the display mode after change) to determine the If there is a special mode pending display, it is usually determined by setting a high rate of special mode pending display at a higher rate than the normal mode pending display, as a target for changing the display mode. When there is a pending display being displayed in a display mode different from the mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to a display mode higher than the current stage can be increased. .

  (6) Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect to be displayed by changing the hold display to any of a plurality of special modes which are display modes different from the normal mode. . In addition, the display mode of the hold display includes a special mode which is easily changed to a special mode as compared with the normal mode. Then, the advance notice effect executing means changes the hold display displayed in the normal mode into a special mode and displays it, and changes the hold display displayed in the special mode into a special mode and displays the same. , In different proportions and displayed in any of a plurality of special modes. For example, when the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than the time when the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode and displayed. The rate of change to the second special mode is high. According to such configuration, it is possible to give notice of the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result with different expectation degrees, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the notice effect.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning, the final display mode (for example, change of whether or not it is possible to execute pre-reading effect on the latest winning determination result) As the upper limit, it does not have to be changed) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started, whether the display mode of any hold display is changed (and which Also in the case where it is determined that the display mode is changed, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process) By setting the final display mode and the pre-reading effect pattern based on the determination result at the time of winning, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is made a special mode Changing the display to the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates when displaying in a different manner and when displaying the hold display displayed in a special mode in a special mode it can. Further, for example, in the effect design change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results Even in the case of a configuration (for example, whether or not to perform pre-reading effect based on each winning determination result and determining the display mode after change) is determined, the winning determination result and the display mode of the hold display are also determined. When the display mode is changed based on the change based on the display mode, the display mode is changed to the special mode and the display mode is changed to the special mode. The display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates.

  (7) In addition, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means indicates a plurality of types of indication effects (the first effect mode or the second effect mode) that indicate the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes with different degrees of expectation. In the case where the suggestion effect (for example, the indication effect of the second effect mode) of a predetermined expectation is executed by the indication effect execution means, the indication effect of the indication display can not be changed. The indication effect limiting means is provided for restricting the execution of the suggestion effect of the expectation degree lower than the predetermined expectation degree (for example, the suggestion effect of the first effect aspect having a lower expectation than the second effect aspect). For example, when the indication effect of the second effect mode is executed but the display mode of the hold display does not change, the suggestion effect restriction flag is set, and while the indication effect restriction flag is set, the second effect aspect It is limited to execute the suggested rendering of the first rendering mode in which the degree of expectation that changes is lower than that of the first rendering mode. Further, the suggestion effect restriction flag is reset when the hold display displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode is erased. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of expectation from being lost.

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the start winning, the final display mode (for example, change of whether or not it is possible to execute pre-reading effect on the latest winning determination result) As the upper limit, it does not have to be changed) and the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, and in the effect pattern change start process where a new change display is started Also in the case where it is determined that the display mode is changed, and the display mode is changed based on the determination result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning determination result in the prefetching effect determination process) While deciding which display mode of the pending display is to be changed (and which display mode is to be changed), the presentation mode of the suggestion effect is determined It is possible to perform a plurality of types of suggested effect suggesting the possibility of changing the display mode of hold display in a different degree of expectation by. Further, for example, in the effect design change start process in which the pre-read effect determination process is omitted and a new change display is started, which of the corresponding hold display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results The display mode of any corresponding suspension display is changed even in the case of (for example, whether or not to perform pre-reading effect and the display mode after change is determined based on each winning determination result) It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display by different expectation degrees by determining whether or not the effect mode of the suggestive effect is determined.

  (8) Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is allowed to be executed repeatedly, and it is also permitted that the display modes of a plurality of suspension displays change simultaneously, but it is possible to change simultaneously. It may be limited. For example, when a change timing of a new look-ahead effect is determined, data indicating the change timing of a previously-determined effect of a look-ahead is referred to the winning determination result storage buffer, and the change timing is the same. The change timing of the pre-reading effect may be redetermined. By doing this, it is possible to focus attention on one by one by changing the display modes of the plurality of suspension displays simultaneously.

  (9) Further, in this embodiment, predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect, but along with this (or in place of this), an effect that outputs sound from a speaker, An effect of lighting the lamp may be performed.

  (10) As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 63 and the like, when the game is controlled to the small hit state in the advantageous game state (high base state) which is advantageous to the player, the disadvantageous game which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state In the state (low base state), when the small hit state is controlled, the special variable winning ball device outputs the big hit 2 signal so that the period after changing from the open state to the closed state is different.

Thus, it is possible to appropriately output the jackpot 2 signal to the outside of the gaming machine when being controlled to the jackpot state. As a result, it is possible that properly recognized outside the pachinko game machine 1 which is controlled to Koatari state.

  Also, as an example of what can be recognized outside, the ratio of occurrence of small hits and high probability big hits in a low base or high base, the number of occurrences of small hits in a low base or high base, and the like can be considered.

  In the embodiment described above, the large hit 2 signal output in the small hit state is output in the low base state longer than in the high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be output at different times, and the high base state may be output longer than the low base state.

  In addition, the timing of stopping the output of the big hit 2 signal is made different between the high base state (advantage game state) and the low base state (favorable game state). However, the combination of the advantageous gaming state and the disadvantageous gaming state is not limited to the combination of the high base state and the low base state, but may be a combination of the high probability state and the low probability state. It may be a combination with the time saving state.

  As an effect by being able to specify outside that a small hit and a huge jackpot have occurred in any of such an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state, the following may be considered.

  A relatively short end display period (when the occurrence of a big or small hit occurs in the advantageous gaming state (for example, high base) and the player is not notified as to which has occurred as in the second modification described above) In the form of 1.1 seconds), while in the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, low base), a sudden big hit or small hit occurs, and it is notified as to which of the players has occurred as in the second modified example described above If not, the end display period is relatively long (12.3 seconds in the present embodiment), and therefore the player is expected to have a sudden big hit and may shift to a definite change state. In such a case, if only a small hit that does not shift to a definite change state occurs, the player is stressed. In addition, when it is considered as a relatively long end display period for the notification of the small hit, the period until the next big hit occurs becomes long, and the interest of the game decreases.

  In the present embodiment, since it is possible to externally specify that a small hit and a sudden big hit have occurred in any of the advantageous gaming state and the disadvantageous gaming state, the game arcade side is based on the information thus identified It is possible to prevent the player from being overly stressed by being able to know the gaming situation of the game in more detail.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, and unlike the present embodiment, in the gaming machine which preferentially digests the reserved memory of the second special symbol, 1 For special symbols, perform big hit judgment and small hit judgment, and for the second special symbol, do not carry out small hit judgment but only make a big hit judgment, or make a big hit judgment and extremely low probability for small hit judgment In the case of performing in the high base, the second special symbol variation display is executed during the high base, so it is difficult to be a small hit, but when the second special symbol variation display is interrupted, the first special symbol If there is a retention memory, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, by reducing the end display time of the small hit in the high base and the low base in the high base, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest due to the occurrence of the small hit in the high base. Can.

  (11) The advantageous gaming state is a state in which the opportunity to output the big hit 2 signal is more likely to occur than the disadvantageous gaming state, and as described in FIG. 63 etc., when controlled to the small hitting state in the advantageous gaming state The output period of the jackpot 2 signal is shorter than when the player is controlled to the small hit state in the disadvantageous gaming state.

  In the advantageous gaming state, since an opportunity to output the big hit 2 signal is easily generated, the interval controlled to the small hit state becomes short. As a result, in the advantageous gaming state where it is easy to generate an opportunity for the big hit 2 signal to be output when being controlled to the small hit state, there is a period during which the big hit 2 signal is output when the small hit state is controlled. Will be shortened. As a result, the big hit 2 signal outputted when being controlled to the small hit state continues until the timing when the big hit 2 signal outputted when being controlled to the next small hit state is outputted Can be suppressed.

  (12) The game field 7 is further provided with a combination operating gate 33, and based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the combination operation gate 33, the game ball is controlled to be a big hit, while the combination operation gate 33 is game ball It is controlled to the small hit state not based on the fact that it entered.

  Thus, the game does not become monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, whether or not the game ball enters the combination operation gate 33 as a trigger to be controlled to the specific game state, whether the player is a big hit or small hit actively It can be distinguished.

  In addition, as described in FIG. 68 of the first modification of the first embodiment, the small hit state similar to the effect described in (10) above, even in the case where the combination operation gate 33 is not provided. As a result of being able to output the signal of the jackpot 2 of 2 appropriately to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to appropriately recognize a specific gaming state such as a small hitting state outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  (13) In addition, as described in the first and second modifications of the first embodiment, as the effects related to when being controlled to a sudden big hit and when to be controlled to a small hit, the common appearance eye is The effect, the common effect display, the notification to aim for the combination operation gate 33, and the common end display are executed. In this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect with a sudden big hit and a small hit.

  The related effects are not limited to exactly the same effects, but may be different effects as long as the effect reminds the player of both the sudden big hit and the small hit. For example, the effect of reminding the player of both the big hit and the small hit is, for example, the same effect as the concept of the effect, the idea received from the effect, and the like, and specific examples will be shown below.

  Performs an effect to make the character A appear in the case of a small hit, and causes the character B to appear in the case of a sudden big hit, using the character A and the character B that evokes the other if the relationship is strongly correlated with each other. The presentation may be performed as a related presentation.

  Further, the related effect may be an effect of which the base color is the same color or similar color. For example, even if the base color of the background is the same color or a similar color, the base color of the appearing character is the same color or a similar color, or the base color of the displayed message is the same color or a similar color Good. The key color refers to the color that is central (main part) in the presentation. The similar color is a color in which the aesthetics (impressions) generated through the visual sense of the player who is the consumer are common.

  Further, the related effects may be effects common to the type, category, genre, category, etc. to which the content of the effect belongs. For example, an effect common to ski jumping competitions, such as the effect that the normal hill of the ski is the subject and the effect that the large hill is the subject, the effect of whether or not to achieve the task A, and whether or not to achieve the task B The effect may be a common effect in that it is a mission effect of whether or not to achieve a predetermined mission such as the effect of.

  Moreover, the timing when such a related effect is performed is not limited at the time of the round start of the hit, but may be during the change of the effect pattern, and the ineffective period of the combination operating gate 33 ends from the change stop. It may be up, may be in a round of a hit, or may be at the end of a hit. The transition to the common mode may be notified as an effect related to the end of the hit.

  In addition, as the related effect, the same or similar notice or reach may be commonly performed during the variable display, or the same or the same may be common from the fluctuation stop to the valid period of the commercial operation gate 33. The effect may be executed, or a common effect mode may be executed after the sudden big hit and the small hit, or these and the above-mentioned effects may be combined and executed.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the output of the big hit 2 signal is started is the same whether it is big hit or small hit. However, the timing may be different.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S1060 to step S1063 of FIG. 39, the output of the jackpot 2 signal is started based on the value of the special symbol process flag. That is, the output is started after the big hit 2 signal shifts to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing of FIG. 27 or the small hit opening pre-processing of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal may be started at another timing. The other timing may be, for example, the timing when the big hit display time or the small hit display time starts or the timing when the special variable winning ball device for the big winning opening is opened. It may be the timing when the gaming ball passes through the combination operation gate 33 when the combination operation gate 33 is not invalid period, or even when the big hit end display time or the small hit end display time has elapsed Alternatively, it may be before or after a predetermined time of these timings.

  In addition, based on the value of the special symbol process flag, it was made to stop the output of the big hit 2 signal. That is, when shifting from the big hit end processing of FIG. 31 or the small hit end processing of FIG. 34 to the special symbol normal processing of FIG. 21, the output of the big hit 2 signal is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal may be stopped at another timing. Other timing may be, for example, timing when the big hit end display time or the small hit end display time has elapsed, or it may be timing when the special variable winning ball device for the big winning opening is closed, It may be timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the output of the jackpot 2 signal was started.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, the jackpot 2 signal is output according to the value of the special symbol process flag. As a result, since the length of the small hit end display is longer in the high base than in the low base, the large hit in the high base is shorter than that in the low base.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the base state, the lengths of the two jackpots may be made different directly. For example, the length of the big hit 2 small hit condition in the high base medium and the low base may be x seconds and y seconds, respectively, and may be x <y or x> y.

  (17) A signal such as a big hit 2 signal output from the terminal board 160 may be transmitted directly to a management device such as a hall computer and to a gaming device such as a card unit or a calling lamp, It may be transmitted via a relay device.

  (18) In the embodiment described above, the signal such as the jackpot 2 signal output from the terminal substrate 160 is turned on when the target event occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal may be turned off when a target event occurs.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, two sets of the special winning opening and the special variable winning ball device are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one set or two or more sets. Also, if two sets of the big winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus are provided, and depending on the type of the hit, two sets are alternately opened each time the round progresses (for example, in the case of a positive change big hit and a normal big hit) Even if the round goes on, only one set may be opened (for example, in the case of a sudden big hit and a small hit).

  (20) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S2471 of FIG. 32, the winning number counter is reset to 0 each time the special variable winning ball device is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning number counter may be continuously counted without resetting the winning number counter every time the special variable winning ball device is opened over a plurality of rounds.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S2485 and step S2491 of FIG. 33, even if the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), in the next round, I was made to open the big prize mouth. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in the above (10), the number of winnings for the big winning opening is continuously counted, and the number of winnings for the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number. In the subsequent rounds, the big winning opening may not be opened.

  (22) In the embodiment described above, the processing of step S1063 and step S1064 of FIG. 39 may be executed between step S1052 and step S1054 of FIG.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 38, two big hit signals are output when being controlled to the big hit and when it is controlled to the small hit. . That is, in the embodiment described above, the jackpot 2 signal is output not from the opening of the big winning opening until the closing, but from before the closing of the big winning opening until after the closing. is there. That is, the period during which the jackpot 2 signal is output is not only during the opening period of the big winning opening, but also the preparation period for opening the big winning opening and the closing of the big winning opening until the next variable display becomes possible. Include a period.

Second Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the aspect of the pre-reading effect is made different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, in the second embodiment, parts different from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing pre-reading effect determination processing. In the pre-reading effect determination process, the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the pre-reading effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67101). The pre-reading effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 described later. If the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode. .

  If the prefetch effect limitation flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the past winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result indicated in the winning determination result designated command received this time) All) are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether all the extracted determination results at the time of winning show the determination results indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is a value indicating that all the variation patterns become “shortening non-reach out” or “non-reach out” in step S67103 (specifically It is determined whether or not “01 (H)” or “02 (H)” (refer to FIG. 16) (that is, it is checked whether or not outlier fluctuation does not occur with reach).

  If all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 indicate “non-reach”, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when the extracted determination results at the time of winning are not all determination results indicating “non-reach”, the effect control CPU 101 normally selects a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c. The form is displayed (step S67116). That is, in this embodiment, when there is a pending storage in which the variable display accompanied by the reach effect is performed, the preread effect is not executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 71, even when there is a pending storage in which variable display with reach effect is performed, the prefetch effect is executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. May be

  In step S67104, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts the latest determination result at the time of winning stored in the determination result storage buffer at the time of winning (result at the time of winning indicated by the command received at the time of winning determination received this time). It is determined based on the hour determination result whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A).

  FIG. 72 (A) is an explanatory view showing a pre-reading effect execution determination table. Although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“Perform pre-reading effect” or “Do not perform pre-reading effect”) is assigned to the pre-reading effect execution determination table for each winning determination result, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“execute the pre-reading effect” or “Do not execute preread effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the numerical values corresponding to "execute pre-read effect" and "do not execute pre-read effect" in the determination result at each winning are "execute pre-read effect" as the determination item. Or “% does not execute pre-reading effect” is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A), the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B), the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although the judgment values are actually assigned to the prefetch presentation effect change timing determination table shown and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 75, the ratio of the determination values assigned to simplify the explanation is shown There is. In addition, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, as in step S67104, the CPU for effect control 101 determines, for example, the final display mode, the prefetching effect Or a random number for determining the presentation mode of the suggested effect is extracted, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is determined as the assigned matter.

  In step S67104, based on the latest winning determination result extracted, the effect control CPU 101 performs the prefetching effect at the rate determined for each winning determination result in the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A). Decide whether to run or not. For example, when the winning determination result indicates that “shortening non-reach is off”, the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the pre-reading effect at a rate of 100%. Further, for example, when it is indicated that “per simulated ream 3 supermarkets” is determined as the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance effect at a rate of 99%.

  The characteristic thing in the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) is that it is displayed as compared with the case where the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification). If the result is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification), the determination value is higher so that the rate at which the prefetch effect is performed is higher It is set. Further, it is characteristic in the pre-read effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) that, even if the display result is the same, the one with which the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed (for example, the super reach is performed than the normal reach) However, the judgment value is set such that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is high. By providing such a feature, when pre-reading effect is executed, it is expected that the rate of occurrence of big hit in the variable display of the advance notice object is increased and the big hit is expected as compared with the case where pre-reading effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the rate at which reach effect with a high degree is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the preread effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed at a ratio of 1% even when the result of the winning determination is "non-reach out", but "non-reach" In the case of "reach out" or "non-reach out", it may not be decided to execute pre-reading effect. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), a determination value (percentage) is set for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect for each of the fluctuation patterns indicated by the winning determination result. Judgment value (percentage) to decide whether or not to execute pre-reading effect for each display result (for example, "off", "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") May be set.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executed (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display the new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode Step S67116.

  In step S67105a, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the counter for the combined pending storage number of effects for specifying the pending display to be the target of the pre-reading effect (step S67105a). The value of the effect combination total storage number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the effect pattern variation start process, and is used to specify the pending display to be the object of the pre-reading effect in step S1811. For example, when the value of the effect combination total storage number counter is 4, the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the fourth suspension display of the total storage position 18c is executed. In this embodiment, the combined pending storage count is the first pending storage count stored in the first pending storage count storage area and the second pending storage count stored in the second pending storage count storage area. It is obtained by summing up The first pending storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first pending storage number specification command, and the second pending storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second pending storage number specification command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. In addition, at the step S1218 of starting opening switch passing processing, the winning a prize decision result designated command is transmitted after sending the 1st pending memory number designated command, and in the step S1228, the 2nd pending memory number designated command was sent. Will be sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the prize determination result specification command after updating the total number of pending storages.

  Next, in the pre-reading effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance is to be displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode and a second special mode are provided. However, as described later, the pending display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined to be either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as special modes.

  FIG. 72 (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table. In step S67106, the CPU for effect control 101 determines which display mode is to be finally displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each of the winning determination results (display results of the variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "off" in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), the effect control CPU 101 The final display mode is determined as the first special mode at a rate of 80%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification) The effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

  The characteristic thing in the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B) is that the display is displayed as compared to the case where the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification). If the result is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification), it is determined that the proportion determined in the second special mode is higher The value is to be set. By providing such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which the jackpot occurs in the variable display for the advance notice is higher than when it is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, the degree of expectation that the one displayed in the second special mode becomes a big hit can be made higher than the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed Can be focused on

  In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the display result shown in the winning determination result (finally, “normally big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) is final. Although the determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set, for example, the final display mode for each variation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning as in the prefetch presentation execution execution determination table of FIG. A determination value (percentage) may be set to determine. By doing so, when the pending display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be high.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of display modes of the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as final display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected depending on the display result may be different).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern of prefetch effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first pre-reading effect pattern and a second pre-reading effect pattern are provided as pre-reading effect patterns. In the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode. The first pre-reading effect pattern is a variation display of the advance target that is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the change display (pending information) of the advance target at the timing of the start winning. The hold indication corresponding to the variable indication (hold information) of the notice object is changed and displayed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing until the (hold information) is started And. On the other hand, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing until the change display of the advance notice object is started, The display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  With the shift timing of the suspension display, the first suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c is erased in the effect symbol variation start process to be described later, the remaining suspension display is shifted one by one, and the total suspension storage display It is the timing (specifically, the timing when step S1800 is executed) of updating the total number of pending storages in the unit 18c. For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed on the fourth is the third display The hold display that has been shifted to the area and shifted to the fifth display is shifted to the fourth display area.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of pending storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case of "hit" (that is, in the case of the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 13 specification), the hit previewing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (A) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate determined for each total pending storage number in the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (A). Decide on either.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is "off" (ie, in the case of winning determination result 1 specification ~ winning determination result 7 specification) 73B uses a hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate determined for each total pending storage number in the out-of-time pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the winning determination result is hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit"), and the total number of pending storages is 2 In some cases, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 65%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the winning determination result is “off” and the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 has a rate of 65% of the pre-reading effect pattern In the first pre-read effect pattern, the second pre-read effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35%.

  The characteristic feature of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is that the display result of the variable display hits (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the proportion determined in the second pre-reading effect pattern is higher in the case of “a sudden definite variation big hit” or “small hit”. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (ie when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination, and then displayed in a special mode after being displayed ) When the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the change display of the advance notice target The rate of occurrence of can be increased. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the rate at which the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode is high, so the prefetching effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (Ie, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then displayed in a special mode), the hold display displayed in the special mode is more likely to be a big hit than the first special mode. The rate of change to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on which pre-reading effect pattern is to be executed. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode at the start winning), the on-hold display displayed in the special mode is expected more than the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the second special mode with a high degree, the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved. Moreover, in this embodiment, the pending display displayed in the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display corresponding to the pending display (hold information) is started. As it is displayed, the sense of expectation can be sustained until the hold display is displayed in a special mode and then changes to a special mode.

  Further, what is characteristic in the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is that the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern when the total number of pending storages is one. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode at the start winning is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is the target of the advance notice. It is an arbitrary shift timing until variable display is started. However, if the total number of pending storages is 1 (that is, only the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target is displayed), when the shift of the hold display is performed once, the variable display of the notice target is supported. The pending display will be erased. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is not possible to change the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the advance target at the shift timing. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the hold display changes from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode in the first pre-reading effect pattern, and the second In the pre-reading effect pattern, the timing at which the suspension display changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice object is started, Not only this but another timing may be sufficient. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during a variable display (a period over one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) which is executed before the start of the variable display of the advance target. In this case, for example, even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is possible to decide on the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the pending display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning prize, corresponding to the pending display (pending information) The special mode may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, the display result indicated by the judgment result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") and "off" For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit” or In the case of “small hit”, a pre-reading effect pattern determination table may be provided which determines any pre-reading effect pattern at a different ratio. Further, for example, similarly to the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), a pre-read effect pattern determination table for determining any pre-read effect pattern at a different ratio is provided for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning determination. You may do so. By doing so, when the pre-read effect is executed in the first pre-read effect pattern, reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice object The proportion can also be high.

  Once the preread effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target is the shift timing of any hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice object at which the display mode is to be changed. For example, when the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed on the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory view of a change timing determination table. In step S67108, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice object based on the change timing determination table and the total hold storage number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case where the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-read effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 74 (A). The hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74A. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning. In the case where the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, for example, a new hold display is realized by displaying the first special mode or the second special mode from the beginning. Alternatively, it may be realized by displaying a new hold display once in a normal mode and immediately changing it to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “off” (that is, in the case of the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), If the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern, the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. 74B. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") (That is, in the case of winning determination determination result 8 specification ~ winning determination determination result 13 specification), when the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hit time shown in FIG. 74 (C) The second look-ahead effect change timing determination table is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the hit second prefetched effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74C. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result is “off” (that is, in the case of the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), If the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, a second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 (D) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. 74 (D). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  For example, when using the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (the number of shifts) to 0 (winning number) at a rate of 50%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. In addition, when using the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) to 0 (prize at 20%). The change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1 at a ratio of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 2 at a ratio of 50%.

  Also, for example, when using the hit second pre-reading effect change timing determination table, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) by 1 at a rate of 30%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%. Further, when using the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a ratio of 70%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

  What is characteristic in the pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 is that, in the case of the first pre-reading effect pattern, the display result of the variable display is hit as compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of shifts is determined to be smaller is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the on-hold display is performed. If the number of shifts changes from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of hitting in the variable display of the advance notice, and further displayed in the special mode at the start winning combination (0 shift). It is possible to increase the rate at which hits occur. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

  What is characteristic in the prefetch presentation effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 is that, in the case of the second prefetch presentation effect pattern, the display result of the fluctuation display hits in comparison with the case where the display result of the fluctuation display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of times of shift changes is determined is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then changed to the special mode), The change to the special mode in which the special mode hold display changes to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts have been made) can increase the rate at which a hit occurs in the advance display of the variable display. That is, the longer the period from the display of the pending display in the special mode to the change to the special mode (that is, the later the timing of the change is), the higher the rate of occurrence of hits in the variable display for the advance notice can be made. . Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and attention can be paid to the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes, which can enhance the fun of the game.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at any timing before the start of display, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns that can specify the timing to be changed (such as a specific shift timing or a specific change display) May be provided, and one of them may be selected in accordance with the result of the winning determination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, in the case of the first prefetch effect pattern, the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing is), the better, and in the case of the second prefetch effect pattern, the larger number of shifts. Is set to be more advantageous (that is, the later the timing of change is), but for the sake of clarity to the player, for example, the one with a large number of shifts even in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern (ie change) The later timing may be set to be advantageous). Also, for example, in the case of the second pre-reading effect pattern, it may be set to be advantageous if the number of shifts is smaller (that is, as the timing of change is earlier).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the display result indicated by the judgment result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") and "off" For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit” or In the case of “small hit”, a change timing determination table may be provided in which any change timing (number of shifts) is determined at different rates. In addition, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), a change to determine one of the change timings (the number of shifts) at a different ratio for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning determination A timing determination table may be provided. By doing so, according to the change timing of the reserve display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the notice target is made different, and the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be different.

  In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, but a hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start win, The timing may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and may be changed from the special mode to the special mode at any later timing.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the change display of the hold display when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern (Y in step S67109) The effect mode of the suggested effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, the suggestive effect is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to the first special mode is high, and when the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode, the pending operation is suspended. The rate at which the display changes to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the suspension display changes by the execution of the suggestion effect, and it is easy to change to any special mode depending on which production mode the suggestion effect is executed. It is suggested. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also performed at shift timings other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish them, the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the pending display is also referred to as a suggested effect (success pattern), and the suggested effect performed at the shift timing other than the changed timing of the pending display is suggested (passed Also known as a pattern. In this embodiment, any of the suggestive effect (success pattern) and the suggestive effect (pass pattern) is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may be different depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A may be different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the pending display changes. The rate of making is low, and the suggested rendering is performed in the second rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode B of this embodiment may be taken as the first rendering mode B different from the second rendering mode and the first rendering mode A) In this case, the rate at which the pending display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the proportion of the suggested effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggested effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B) In the case where it is carried out in the above, the proportion of the suggested effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory view of a suggestion effect mode determination table. In step S67110, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the latest determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode is set to the first effect mode or the effect mode at a ratio determined for each at-time determination result (display result of variation display) in the final display mode determination table. One of the second rendering modes is determined. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "off" in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), the effect control CPU 101 The effect mode is determined to be the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and the effect mode is determined to be the second effect mode at a rate of 20%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification) The effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 80%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "suddenly probability big hit" or "small hit" in the winning determination result (corresponding to the winning determination result 13 specified), for effect control The CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 50%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 50%.

  The characteristic thing in the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 75 is that the display result is "compared to the case where the display result is" off "(corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification). It is set so that the ratio determined as the second effect mode is higher in the case of normal big hit "or" probable variation big hit "(corresponding to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification). It is. By providing such a feature, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance target is higher than when it is displayed in the first effect mode. can do. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the percentage of the final display mode of the hold display becoming the second special mode is high, so the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode When this happens, the rate at which the display mode of the pending display changes to the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode is high. Therefore, while being able to give variety to suggestion production, it can be made to pay attention to which suggestion production of presentation mode is performed, and it is possible to improve game interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75, the effect of the presentation effect suggested for each display result shown in the winning determination result (“off”, “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”). Although the ratio for determining the mode is determined, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation execution execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), the presentation mode of the suggested presentation is determined for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning. It is also possible to set a determination value (ratio) for By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed Can also be high.

  In this embodiment, the suggested effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the pending display changes, but the suggested effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of presentation modes of a 1st presentation mode and a 2nd presentation mode are provided as a production mode of suggestion production, it is not restricted to this but three or more types of presentation modes are provided. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio of selection according to the display result may be different).

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly performed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, control is performed so as not to newly execute pre-reading effect. Therefore, the display of a plurality of pending displays in a special manner is limited. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be noted.

  In this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, it is controlled not to execute pre-reading effect repeatedly, but it is not limited to this, pre-reading effect is overlappingly executed It may be permitted at a fixed rate or completely permitted. That is, the process of step S67111 may be partially or completely omitted, so that a plurality of pending displays may be displayed in a special mode or completely. In addition, for example, even when any one of the suspension displays is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode as well as in the special mode, control may be performed so as not to repeatedly perform the pre-reading effect. For example, when executing the process of step S67114 or when performing the process of step S67115, or when it is determined that it is the timing to change the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode in the effect symbol variation start process described later , And step S1803, etc.) by setting the prefetch effect restriction flag. Also, in this case, the pre-reading effect restriction flag may be reset when the pending display displayed in the special mode is deleted (that is, while the pending display is displayed in the special mode, the pre-reading effect) Execution is limited). In this way, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that the other hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode by the new pre-reading effect. Therefore, the player can easily understand which hold display to watch.

  In addition, for example, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode, a new pre-reading effect may be easily performed. That is, the pre-reading effect may be superimposed and may be easily performed. In addition, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probability change state or a time saving state), the pre-reading effect may be made to be performed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows repeated execution of pre-reading effects at a constant rate, in the case of a specific gaming state, this can be realized by increasing the allowed rate.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total suspension storage number display unit 18c to display a new suspension display in a special mode (step S67112). In step S67112, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and an effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating an aspect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  Further, if the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second pre-reading effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if the first pre-reading effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process in step S67108. It is confirmed whether the determined change timing is the start winning combination (step S67113). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the change timing is the start winning combination (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage number display portion 18c to display a new hold display in the final display mode determined in step S67107. (Step S67114).

  Further, if the change timing is not winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display as in the above step S67110 ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total suspension storage number display unit 18c to display a new suspension display in the normal mode (step S67116). In step S67116 (for example, only when the process proceeds from step S67115), similarly to step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a new hold display, and the final display determined in step S67106. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the prize determination result specification command is received, the new hold display is either the normal mode, the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode in the pre-reading effect determination process. Processing to display at is performed.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is given priority. If it is configured to be executed, (1) it is configured to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the first special symbol, and (2) only the variable display of the second special symbol There are three possible configurations: one is to perform prefetching effects for the target, and (3) the configuration is to perform prefetching effects for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .

  When the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift number counter according to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number Maximum 4 is set to. However, even if the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with the configuration of the above (1), the first start winning opening 14 will receive the first prize. (2) Since the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted and executed (in priority order, not in the winning order), for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the effect symbol described later, even at the shift timing It is desirable to configure so as not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b of the fluctuation start process. Moreover, also when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the configuration of the above (3), similarly, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed It is desirable to configure so as not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b of the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above (2) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift is made according to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) A maximum of 4 is set in the number counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of the above (1), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted when the shift timing comes, regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is subjected to variable display. Moreover, also in the configuration of the above (3), even when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, similarly, any of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Even when the variable display is performed, the value of the shift number counter is subtracted at the shift timing.

  In addition, when it is constituted so that priority is given to change display of the 2nd special symbol, in high base, it is constituted so that pre-reading effect is not performed for change display of the 1st special symbol. May be In addition, when it is constituted in order to execute with fluctuation indication of 2nd special symbol priority, it is constituted so as not to do pre-reading effect based on the winning a prize to 1st starting winning a prize mouth 13 in the big hit game It is also good. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed This can be realized by performing control so as not to execute even if it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect, if it is determined not to execute, or the winning combination determination result specification command received in the effect control microcomputer 560 is determined to be performed. . In addition, when adding the configuration of the above (3) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, during high base or during a big hit game, prefetching based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 Although the effect is not performed, the pre-reading effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 may be performed. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed If it is decided not to execute, or if it is decided to cancel the command at the time of winning result judgment command based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13 received in the microcomputer 560 for effect control, it is not executed It can be realized by controlling as follows.

  In the case where the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, there is a pending storage based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 When a winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs, it is possible not to execute the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in the case of adding the configuration of the above (1) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 In the state where the execution is determined, when a winning on the second start winning opening 14 occurs, the execution of the pre-reading effect which has already been determined may be canceled.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the pre-reading effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol (above (( 1)) Alternatively, a configuration (the above-mentioned (2)) may be added to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but for example, during the high base middle or during a big hit game, to the first start winning opening 13 Pre-reading effects may not be performed based on the winnings of.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the content of the winning determination result storage buffer And erase the first pending display in the combined pending storage display unit 18c, shift the remaining pending displays one by one, and update the combined pending storage number display in the combined pending storage display unit 18c (see Step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed on the fourth is the third display The hold display that has been shifted to the area and shifted to the fifth display is shifted to the fourth display area. In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given to one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the change display of it is executed, production control CPU101 is synchronized to the 1st special symbol fluctuation display When the fluctuation display of the effect design is executed (specifically, when the 1st design fluctuation specified command reception flag is set), it is the 1st that the 1st winning a prize decision result storage buffer remembers The winning determination result is deleted, and the content of the first winning determination result storage buffer is shifted. In addition, when performing fluctuation display of the production symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol fluctuation specification command reception flag is set), at the time of the second winning The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the content of the second winning determination result storage buffer is shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is larger than 0 (step S1801). That the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 means that it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. Is shown. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of the shift number counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift number counter is 0 and it is determined that the pre-reading effect is performed (the display mode of the hold display is changed) If not, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1804.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display), for effect control The CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the effect sum total storage number counter (step S1802a). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the shift number counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b, the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 means that one of the display modes of the hold display displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. It indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, when the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1808.

  In step S1804, the effect control CPU 101 reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The stop symbol) is determined (step S1805). That is, by the effect control CPU 101 executing the process of step S1805, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) performed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect performed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestive effect (pass pattern).

  In step S1806, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any holding display is not displayed in a special mode in the total holding display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 suggests in FIG. 76A. It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (pass pattern) or to execute the first effect mode or the second effect mode at a ratio of the effect (pass pattern) determination table. Further, when the prefetch control effect flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the suggested effect shown in FIG. 76 (B). (Passing Pattern) It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute it in the first effect mode or the second effect mode by the ratio of the determination table. In addition, although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the suggested effect (pass pattern) determination table, FIG. In the example shown to A) and (B), in order to simplify description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and the determination items (“no effect”, “No effect”, or the (1) It is decided on the "presentation mode" or the "second presentation mode").

  For example, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when no hold display is displayed in the special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, it is determined that the suggested effect (pass pattern) is not executed at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, it is assumed that the suggested effect (pass pattern) is not executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (A) and 76 (B), in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the totals hold display unit 18c. In the case where they are present, the suggestive effects are executed at a higher rate than in the case where they are not. Therefore, the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode can be enhanced, and the game interest can be enhanced. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect may not be performed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestion effect be performed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first display mode or Depending on which of the second display modes is selected, the effect mode of the suggested effect may be determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode at different rates. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second display mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the first display mode, the effect mode in the suggested effect is the second effect mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the first effect mode. The rate to be determined may be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of the suggestion effect (success pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow is stuck in the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified. Further, when the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestion effect (pass pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1806, it is not necessary to specify the pending display corresponding to the pending information to be notified, using step S1811, which will be described later, using the counter for total number of pending storages for effect. Note that, for example, in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes at both the time when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not the time. When it is the timing to change the display mode of the hold display by performing display control in which the arrow in which the arrow flew from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified, the hold display When it is not the timing to change the display mode (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect of this example (pass pattern Equivalent to)). In this case, in step S1806, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the pending display corresponding to the pending information to be notified using the combined pending memory number counter for effect as in step S1811 described later, and step S1807 You may select the process table for executing the suggestion effect to the hold display identified in step, or randomly determine the hold display that the arrow sticks from among the displayed hold display, and for the determined hold display You may make it select the process table for performing suggestion production.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the fluctuation pattern of the determined effect effect (passing pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speakers 27R and 27L as presentation parts is executed (step S1813). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to cause the speakers 27R and 27L to output sound, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S1814), and processes the value of the effect control process flag during the production symbol fluctuation (step S802) To a value corresponding to (step S1815).

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pre-reading effect restriction flag. If it is, it is reset (step S1808). By performing such processing, in this embodiment, it is possible to newly limit the execution of the pre-reading effect during the period in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode, and a plurality of hold displays are special. It can be limited to be displayed in an aspect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the effect pattern (in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The stop symbol) is determined (step S1810).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table for display mode change according to the effect mode of the suggested effect, the final display mode of the suspension display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  With the process table for display mode change, along with the fluctuation display of the production design, at the start of the fluctuation of the production design, execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) and execute the pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of process tables for changing display modes are provided in accordance with the modes of the suggested effect (success pattern) to be executed and the pre-read effect. Also, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the suggested presentation (success pattern) determined (step S67110 or S67115) and stored in the prefetch presentation effect determination process (in this example, the first presentation aspect or the second presentation aspect) And the suspension display of the presentation object specified by the staging total storage number counter (for example, when the value of the staging total storage number counter is 2, the second suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c) , And in any manner based on the final display manner (in this example, the first display manner or the second display manner) determined in the pre-reading effect determination processing (step S67106) and stored in any manner. Can be specified to specify which pending display is to be changed to what display mode to execute the pre-reading effect. Therefore, the CPU for effect control 101 displays a plurality of types of display modes according to the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the on-hold display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. A presentation mode determined in the pre-reading effect determination process by selecting any of the process table for change time and executing control of the presentation device according to the contents of process data 1 of the selected process table for change time display mode The suggestion effect (success pattern) can be executed and the pre-reading effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object to the determined display mode can be performed.

  Next, a specific example of pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation display of the effect pattern is being performed, and the two suspension displays are on the total suspension storage display unit 18c in the normal mode ("o" in this example). When the start winning is performed when displayed, the aspect of the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display aspect, change timing) and the aspect of the suggestion effect are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result Ru. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the first pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the start winning combination (shift number 0) or shift Determined to be 1 time. Further, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not displayed in the special mode once, and the first display mode is displayed. It is displayed in the special mode or the second special mode. Also, the timing at which the hold indication is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the timing of the start winning or any shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B1), the timing of the start winning combination The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display unit 18c in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). In addition, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B2), the timing of the start winning combination The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display unit 18c in a second special mode (in the present example, two “x” s are included in “o”).

  Also, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not to the start winning combination timing (the number of shifts 0) but to any shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 77 (B3), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the total hold storage display unit 18c at the timing of the start winning. Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 77 (C)) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display is changed In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 77 (D1)).

  When the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E1), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the shift timing (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). An effect (suggestive effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed at (B3), which corresponds to the pending display newly displayed in (B3), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the first special mode (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E2), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed on (B3), which corresponds to the hold indication newly displayed in (B3), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the second special mode (In this example, two "x" s are included in "o") and displayed.

  In addition, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, as the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 77 (D2)).

  Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E3), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). A presentation (indication effect (success pattern) of the second presentation mode) in which a white arrow is pierced is performed at (B3) corresponding to the suspension display newly displayed in (B3), and the suspension display with the white arrow pierced is the first special mode (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E4), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 77 (FIG. 77). A presentation with a white arrow stuck to it (corresponding to the pending display newly displayed in (B3)) (indication effect in the second presentation mode (success pattern)) is performed, and the pending display with the white arrow stuck is the second special mode (In this example, two "x" s are included in "o") and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the pending display is the first compared to the case of the first effect mode. The rate of becoming the second special aspect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit than the one special aspect is configured to be high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when the black arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 77 (D1) to FIG. 77 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when the white arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 77 (D2) to FIG. 77 (E4) is high. By being configured in this manner, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) in which the arrow flies and sticks to the hold display makes it feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is the first effect mode When a black arrow flies, it is possible to make the user feel that he / she wants you to pass without sticking to the hold display (I want a suggestion effect (pass pattern)).

  FIGS. 78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is being displayed, and the two hold displays are in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the total hold storage display unit 18c. When the start-up winning is performed when displayed, the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the indication effect mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is 1 shift number or 2 shift number Decide. Also, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing. , And displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect pattern is determined to be the second pre-reading effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the third holding display is a special mode (total display hold storage display unit 18c at the timing of start winning). In this example, six lines are drawn on the outside of “o”.

  Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 78 (C)) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes. (Second Effect Mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 78 (D)).

  Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in (E1) of FIG. An effect (suggestive effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which the second arrow display 18c (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) is pierced with a white arrow At the same time, the hold display in which the white arrow is stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 78 (E2), the total hold storage display unit 18c is at the shift timing. While the second arrow display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) is pierced with a white arrow (suggestion effect of the second show mode (success pattern)) is performed The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 78 (E3), a suggested effect (second effect mode in which the white arrow passes without sticking to any pending display at the shift timing) Suggested staging (passing pattern) is performed. In addition, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 78 (E3) is performed when it is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is to be executed in the second effect mode in the effect symbol variation start process. As described above, in this embodiment, display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) is flung from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow bites into the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is made), the display mode changes, and the arrow marks any hold display If it passes without passing (if suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed), the display mode does not change.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the production design is stopped (Fig. 79 (F)) and the fluctuation display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first pending display is shifted. At this time, a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) display control in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes (FIG. 79 (G) ).

  Then, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 79 (H1), the total hold storage display unit 18c is at the shift timing. Along with the effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the first pending display of (corresponding to the pending display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) , The hold display with a black arrow is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 79 (H2), the total hold storage display unit 18c is at the shift timing. Along with the effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the first hold display of (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) , And the display with the black arrow stuck is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the on-hold display corresponding to the variable display (on-hold information) to be notified is temporarily displayed without being displayed in the special mode. , The first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the timing of the start winning. Further, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. It is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at any shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, various timings can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. When the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the pending display may be displayed in the first special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode before the variable display based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is started. (2) Since the game is changed to the special mode and displayed, the game entertainment can be improved.

Summary of Second Embodiment
(1) As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to execute the display processing and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning and the like. A determination means is provided. In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control is realized by executing pre-reading effect determination processing, effect design fluctuation start processing and the like, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the pending display corresponding to the pending storage (total pending storage display The effect execution means is provided to execute the pre-reading effect for displaying the reserve storage in the unit 18c in the first special mode or the second special mode. Then, the effect executing means can change the hold display into the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (timing of start winning, shift timing, etc.) and can display the hold display as a special mode. Control is performed to change and display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. It is configured to By being configured in this way, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so various display timings of the hold display can be changed. While changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode when the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  (2) Further, in this embodiment, whether the microcomputer 100 for effect control changes the display mode of the pending display, which is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process or the effect pattern fluctuation start process, etc. And a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect (a suggestion effect (success pattern) and a suggestion effect (pass pattern)) for suggesting Then, the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effects are executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

  (3) Further, in this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect execution means makes a determination target at a high percentage as compared to when it is determined that a big hit does not occur. The hold indication corresponding to is displayed in a second special mode. In addition, the effect executing means does not display the hold display in the special mode when performing pre-reading effect in the second pre-reading effect pattern which is displayed by changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. The hold display is configured to be displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when performing the prefetching effect in the first preview effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. By being configured in this way, when the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the percentage displayed in the second special mode having a high expectation of becoming a big hit is increased, so that a sense of expectation can be enhanced. Game interest can be improved.

  (4) Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed in the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the effect executing means determines that the change timing is the winning time (0 fluctuation). The hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning when it is determined, and a first timing until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started (for example, the first hold display after the start winning) Of the hold display at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the timing when the second hold display shift is performed after the start winning) from the special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode It is possible to change to 2 special modes and to display. Then, the effect executing means determines that the hold display is made at the first timing or the second timing at a different ratio at a different ratio depending on whether the judgment means judges that the judgment result is a big hit and the judgment result is not a big hit. It is comprised so that it may be changed and displayed to 1 special aspect or a 2nd special aspect. By being configured in this manner, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  (5) Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing the process of setting the pre-reading effect restriction flag, and when the on-hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is newly put on hold It is arranged to be provided with limiting means for limiting the display in a special way. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode.

  (6) Further, in this embodiment, when the determining means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect executing means is a target to be determined at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. The hold display corresponding to the hold storage is displayed in the second special mode. Further, the effect executing means performs the first effect (e.g., a black arrow) when performing pre-reading effect with the first pre-reading effect pattern to be displayed by changing the holding display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. When performing a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode to fly and stick to the hold display, and changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the first effect Performs a different second effect (for example, a suggestive effect (success pattern) of a second effect aspect in which a white arrow flies and sticks to a retention indication), and changes the suspension indication from the special aspect to the first special aspect or the second special aspect There are times when it makes it display. And, the effect executing means is configured to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates depending on when the first effect is performed and the second effect is performed. ing. By being configured in such a manner, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first effect and the second effect is performed, and to improve the game interest it can.

  In this embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode changes from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other timing may be included. For example, any timing until the start of the variable display of the advance object (specifically, a period during one change display or a plurality of change displays executed before the start of the variable display of the advance object) The hold display may be displayed in a special mode.

  (7) Further, in this embodiment, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode in the second pre-reading effect pattern is only the timing of the start winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The normal mode may be displayed, and the special mode may be changed and displayed at any shift timing, or any timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started (specifically, the change of the advance notice object) The hold display may be displayed in a special manner in one variable display or a period spanning a plurality of variable displays) which is executed until display is started. Further, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the timing at which the suspension display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode is not limited to the shift timing, and the suspension display is displayed in the special mode, and then the variable display of the advance notice target is displayed. It may be any timing until the start (specifically, a period during one variable display or a plurality of variable displays which is executed before the start of the variable display of the preview object).

  (8) Further, in this embodiment, as the effect pattern of the pre-reading effect, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be previewed is not displayed once in the special mode, and the second display mode 1) The first prefetch effect pattern displayed in the special mode or the second special mode, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance at the timing of the start winning is displayed in a special mode, and any shift timing The second pre-reading effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode may be included, but only the second pre-reading effect pattern may be included. Even in this case, when the pre-reading effect is performed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is temporarily displayed in the special mode, but from the special mode to the special mode, a plurality of timings Because it is changed at any timing (such as shift timing), it is possible to provide diversity in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, and to improve the game interest.

  (9) Further, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is always displayed by changing from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, for example, The special mode may not be changed. In this case, when the hold indication is not changed from the special mode to the special mode, and the variable display corresponding to the hold indication (hold information) is started, the change is made from the special mode to the special mode. It is desirable to configure so that the rate of big hit is low. By doing this, it is possible to be more interested in changing the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to the special mode. Also, in this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured to be changed to the special mode and to be displayed at a higher rate than the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state. It is desirable to do. By doing this, it is possible to give an interest in changing the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is also possible to enhance expectation when displayed in the special mode. .

  (10) In this embodiment, predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect, but along with this (or in place of this), an effect that outputs sound from a speaker, An effect of lighting the lamp may be performed. Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect (an arrow pierces (or passes)) acting on a change in the hold display, and the hold display changes according to the result of the show (when the arrow pierces, the hold is held The display does not have to be an effect acting on the change of the hold display). For example, even if the display mode of the hold display is changed or not changed, an effect of sticking an arrow to a specific hold display is performed as a suggestive effect. And when changing a pending | holding display, you may make it not change the pending | holding display which the arrow pierced by suggestion effect, when changing the pending | holding display which the arrow pierced by suggestion effect. That is, although the mode of the suggestion effect (the flying arrow sticks to a specific hold display) is the same as when the hold display changes and when it does not change, the result (the display mode of the hold display with the arrow stuck is It may be made to perform a pending change presentation which changes whether or not it changes.

[Summary of the entire embodiment]
(1) In the above embodiment, “different in proportion” means that the proportion differs in relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 40%: 60%. It is a concept including not only those having different proportions in relation such as A: B = 100%: 0% (ie, one in which one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

  (2) Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, A sound / lamp board provided with functions by the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 such as the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4 or by the circuits mounted on the lamp driver board 35 ) May be transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for effect control in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  (3) Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo ream, the fluctuation is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted at one time is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the fluctuation time or the fluctuation mode) after (2) stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can also be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  (4) Further, the configuration described in the above embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various types of gaming machines. For example, the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments may be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in the enclosed area (e.g., in the pachinko machine), and the gaming area provided in the pachinko machine To play the game balls through the game area, collect the game balls through the collecting unit (for example, each winning opening, out port, far ball return port), and discharge the collected game balls to the game area again. Circulate in the enclosed area. In addition, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, when there is a winning on each winning opening, points corresponding to the number of winning balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the winning balls. Processing is performed.

  (5) Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and the game is operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. It is also possible to apply to

  (6) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 effect display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20a 1st special variable winning ball device, 20b Second special variable winning ball device, 31 game control board (main board), 56 CPU, 560 microcomputer for game control, 80 effect control board, 100 microcomputer for effect control, 101 CPU for effect control, 109 VDP.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media, performing variable display, and controlling to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information on variable display as holding storage information;
Hold display means for displaying a hold display according to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means;
A determination unit that determines whether or not to control the specific gaming state;
A determination unit that determines whether or not the specific gaming state is controlled before the determination by the determination unit;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the notice effect execution means for performing the advance notice effect for giving notice of the possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode and displaying it When,
Suggested effect execution means for executing a suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending display changes
A variable winning ball device which is provided in a game area and which can be changed to a first state in which the game medium easily enters and a second state in which the game medium is less likely or not to enter than the first state;
Game control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state which is easy to control to the specific gaming state as compared to the normal gaming state;
In the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state in which a period during which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is a first period, and the variable winning ball device is controlled in the first state Including a second specified gaming state, which is a second period in which the period is shorter than the first period,
The game control means controls the game state to the special game state when the second specific game state is ended,
The period during which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is the second period, and it is possible to control to a special gaming state in which the gaming state is not changed after the end.
The game machine further comprises external output means for outputting a special game state signal to the outside of the gaming machine when being controlled to the special game state,
The external output means continuously outputs the special game state signal for a specific period after the variable winning ball device changes from the first state to the second state,
The specific period differs when the special gaming state is controlled from the advantageous gaming state for the player and when it is controlled to the special gaming state from the gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state,
The game machine further comprises an effect execution means for executing an effect related to when being controlled to the second specific gaming state and when being controlled to the special gaming state,
The specific period is shorter when the special gaming state is controlled from the advantageous gaming state than when the special gaming state is controlled from the disadvantageous gaming state.
The suggestion effect includes a suggestion effect of a first pattern executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, and a suggestion effect of a second pattern performed when the display mode of the hold display does not change,
The suggestion effect of the second pattern is executed even when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display means , and , when the there is a display pending that is displayed in a manner different from the usual aspect, at a higher rate than without the hold display, characterized in that the suggestion effect of the second pattern is performed Gaming machine.